s

HANDBOOK OF PALI

CD

CO

PUBLISHED BY WILLIAMS

Sf

NORQATE.

Clotli, gilt.

Price 18.

Buddha; His
Dr.

Life,

His Doctrine, His Order.

By

Hehjtaxn Oldexbeho, Professor at the University of Berlin, Editor of the Yinaya Pitakam and the Dipavamsa in Translated from the German by "William Hoey, M.A., Pali.
D.Lrr.,

Member

of the

Royal Asiatic Society, Asiatic Society

Civil Service.

of Bengal, etc., of

Her Majesty's

8vo. cloth.

Price 21.

A Manual

of

Buddhism

in its

Modem

Development

translated

from Singhalese MSS. By R. Spence Hardy, M.R.A.S., Author of "Eastern Monachism." Second Edition, with a complete Index by Dr. 0. Ekankfubtee.

By

the same Author.

8vo. cloth.

Price 12.

Eastern Monachism

an Account of the Origin, Laws,

Discipline, Sacred "Writings, Mysterious Rites, Religious Ceremonies, and Present Circumstances of the Order of Mendicants

founded by Gotama Buddha (compiled from Singhalese MSS. and other Original Sources of Information). "With Comparative Notices of the Usages and Institutions of the "Western Ascetics, and a Review of the Monastic System.

8vo. cloth.

Price 10.

6rf.

Ehys Davids' Buddhism

Growth
of Religion,
as

Lectures on the Origin and

illustrated

History of Indian

Buddhism.

By

T. \V.

by some points in the Rhys Davids, Esq.

Being the Hibbert Lectures 1881.

WILLIAMS & NORGATE,

14,

Henrietta Street, Covent Garden, London;

Street,

and 20, South Frederick

Edinburgh.

PUBLISHED BY WILLIAMS ^ NORQATE.

BOOKS IN PALI.
BUDDHIST SCRIPrrRES IN PALI.
In 5
vols. 8vo.

Price 21

each vol.

The Vinaya Pitakam, one

of the principal Buddhist Holy Scriptures in the Pali Language. Edited by Dr. H. Oldenbeeg. Vol. I. The Mahavagga, with an Introduction. Vol. III. The Suttavibhanga, I. Vol. II. The Cullavagga. Vol. IV. The Nissaggiya). Samghadisesa, Anyata, (Parajika,

End of Mahavibhanga, BhikkhunlviSuttavibhanga, II. bhanga. Vol. V. The Parivara. Published with the assistance of the Royal Academy of Berlin, and of the Secretary of India in Council.
8vo. cloth.

Price 21.

The Dipavamsa, an Ancient Buddhist

The Dipavamsa
tains
is

Historical Ee-

cord in the Pali Language. Edited, with an English Translation, by Dr. H. Oldenberg.
the most ancient historical

work

of the Ceylonese

an account of the

ecclesiastical history of the

it conBuddhist Church, of the

;

conversion of the Ceylonese to the Buddhist faith, and of the ancient history of Ceylon.

8vo.

Price

21. The Pali Text

Max
Miilier

The Milinda
*'

Pafiho.

Being Dialogues between King

Milinda and the Buddhist Sage Nagasena. edited by V. Tbencknee, of Copenhagen.

very interesting dialogue between Milinda and Nagasena."

*

in Chips I.

" Next in order of interest should undoubtedly be named the Milinda Fafiha Menander.' "Whatever be the origin of this remarkable work, there can be no doubt of its great antiauity, for it exhibits a familiarity with Greek names and places, and records a religious discussion between the Buddhist divine Nagasena and a Yona ' king Milinda, who can be identified with cerChildera in FuH Dictionary. tainty with the Bactrian king Menander."
;

or. Questions of

Also Bvo.

Price

4.
I.

Pali Miscellany,
and Notes.

by V. Trenckner. Part
tiie

The

Intro-

ductory Part of

Milinda Panho, an English Translation

WILLIAMS & NORGATE,

and
20,

14, Henrietta Street, Covent Garden, London South Frederick Street, Edinburgh.

HANDBOOK OF

PALI.

3^

.^

HANDBOOK OF

PALI.

AN ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR,
A CHRESTOMATHY, AND A GLOSSARY.

COMl'ILEU BY

0.

FRANKFURTER,

Ph.D.

WILLIAMS AND NORGATE,

14,

HENRIETTA STREET, COVENT GARDEN, LONDON; AND 20, SOUTH FREDERICK STREET, EDINBURGH.
1883.

HERTFORD:
rUMTED BT 8TKPBBN
AVSTI.t

AMD

BOMS.

TO THE EEVEEEND

RICHARD MORRIS,

LL.D., M.A.,

TICE-PBESIDEKT OF THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIEir,

AS A TOKEir

OF FBIEKDSHIP AND KESPECT.

ERRATA
Page

XXIV
Page.
line.

ERRATA.
BUD.
paligiintliito.
Page.
line.

BKAU.

124 125
125

146

7,8?
14
16

sammata.
sammata.
avippavasaih.

8 18?
12

dakklUnti.

147 144

Kasibharadvajo.

132
143 144
144

sampajano.
upajjhayena.

148
149 150

24 27
9

anumodama.
yacati.

20

11, etc. ussaho.

dharayamlti.

35

haritattaya.

1544 18 1544 30

anu'kathayati.
anu-parayati.
ussaho.
satta-nikdyo.

170* 29 1735 34

bhikkhunl.
valittaro.
'

159a 12

176a 25 add. sata-padt

pede.*

(f)

a centi-

165a

167a

9 add. panudanam ' removal.'

Pag'e 60.
e.g.

The

first

person plural of the optative ends sometimes in

'

a,'

viharemu, j'dnemu.

This

is

an archaic form, occurring mostly

io

verses.

CONTENTS.
FAOB
Preface
Pali Bibliography
.
.

ix

PAOB SamaneraPanham (Khuddaka Nikaya) 82

Dvatimsakuram ,, ,, Paccavekkhana (Anguttara Nikaya) Dasadhammasuttam ,, ,,
82 82 83

XT

Pakt
Alphabet
Pronunciation

I
1
1

Mahamangalasuttam
.

(Khuddaka
. .

Classification of Letters

2
2 3

Vowels Short Vowels Long Vowels Nasal Vowels

.

Nikaya) Ratanasuttam (Khuddaka Nikaya) Karanlyamettasuttam

.

.84
.

5
7 7 7

85 88 Khandhaparittam(AnguttaraNikaya) 89 90 Mettasuttam ,, Mettanisamsam (Jataka) . .91

,, Moraparittam Candaparittam (Samyutta Nikaya)
.

Interchange of Vowels Consonants .

Phonetic Changes . Compound Consonants

.92
.

92

8
II

Suriyaparittam

,,

,,

.93
94
96

Sandhi

21

Euphonic Changes
Declension
.

Declension of Nouns

Comparison

Declension of Pronouns

Numerals
Cardinals
.

Ordinals

24 25 29 41 42 47 47 49
61

The Verb

Present System . Modes of the Present Tense

Perfect System . Aorist and Imperfect

53 58 60 61 66

. Dhajaggaparittam Mahakassappattherabojjhangam . (Samyutta Nikaya) Girimanandasuttam (Samyutta Nikaya) Atilnatiyasuttam (Digha Nikaya) Dhammacakkappavattanasuttam . (Samyutta Nikaya) Mahusamayasuttam (Dlgha Nikaya) Alavakasuttam (Samyutta Nikaya) Parabhavasuttam (Khuddaka Nikaya) Vasalasuttam
. . . .

97 101
109 112 118
120 122 126

KasibharadvajasuttaTn

,,

,,

Future
Conditional
Participles, Infinitives

Gerunds

67 69 70 70 73 74

Saccavibhangam (Majjhima Nikaya) 127 Arunavatisuttam (Samyutta Nikaya) 133 136 Devadahasuttam ,, 142 A Collection of Kammavacas
. .

Indeclinables

Part
Glossary Tables of Alphabets

III.

Adverbs
Prepositions
.

162
:

Compounds

Sinhalese Alphabet.

Part

II.

Saranagamanam (Khuddaka Nikaya)

Burmese Alphabet. Kambodian Alphabet.

Comparative Table of Alphabets.
b

PREFACE.
The Handbook
of Piili which I place before

my

readers

consists of three parts,

an Elementary Grammar, a Chresto-

mathy, and a Glossary.

grammar an elementary one, because no attempt has been made to distinguish the different periods in the development of the language. To write a scientific
I have called the

grammar

of Pali,

it

would be necessary not only

to

have

recourse to the different so-called ancient Prakritic dialects,

but also to the modern Aryan languages of India, more

especially Mahrathl.

I believe MahrathI to be, if not the

daughter of Pali, at least more closely allied to it than any other of the Indian vernacular tongues and among
;

these I include also Sinhalese.

In

fact,

a scientific Pali

grammar

can, in

my

opinion, only be written as part of a

comparative grammar of the Aryan languages of India.

I have called this work a Handbook of Pali. This requires

some explanation.

am

well aware that Professor Forch-

hammer,

in his report of the

Rangoon High
as

School, 1879-

1880, has shewn

conclusively,

did the late Professor

Childers before him, that Pali means only Sacred Texts.

Professor Forchhammer, quoting from Burmese books, says " The Tipitaka Pali was written by means of the Magadha" bhasha ; and again, " The Pali of the Tipitaka may be
:

preached

He goes on to by means of any language." remark that "a Pali grammar and a Pali dictionary must

PREFACE.

appear to the Burmans as an incomprehensible misnomer,

or at best what to us would be a Bible dictionary or a

grammar

of the

New
to

Testament."

I believe the examples

are not very well chosen.

ment we expect

In a grammar of the New Testafind the New Testament Greek.

Bible dictionary would

mean a

cyclopaedia,

in

which one

can find information on any Bible subject.

I could have chosen

"Handbook

of Miigadhl" as a
is

title

of the book; but this would imply more than

actually

given in the book.

to find a

Under such a

title

one would expect

grammar

of the Miigadhese Inscriptions and of

the MagadhI of the drama.

Moreover, in calling

it

Handbook

of MagadhI, I should have committed myself to

a definite statement about the country in which the language of the Buddhist Scriptures was spoken.
Pali means for

European scholars the sacred language of the Buddhist Scriptures, and as a matter of convenience this designation
ought to be kept until conclusive proofs are adduced to shew in which part of India this Prakrit dialect was
spoken.

"We have moreover the excellent authority of

Subhuti,

who

calls his

Abhidhdnappadlpikd a Pali dictionary,

and

his

Ndmamdld
MS.

a work on Pali grammar.

As
is

a reading-book I have chosen the Paritta.

in the British

The

text

based on a

Museum

(Or. 1092), written

in Sinhalese characters.

Besides this I had several printed

Burmese

copies,

and one printed Sinhalese copy of the book.

the
selection

They however vary in

of the Paritta has, as
is

they give.

None
Part

contains all the extracts given in the reading-book.

well known, been published by the and late Professor Childers, by the late M. Grimblot, with Some of the notes and translations by M. L^on Feer.
suttas

which

in

" are given as the " Extraits du Paritta

PREFACE.

xi

belonging to the Sutta Nipata occur also in the Samyutta

Nikaya.
lished

The two

suttas of the

by the late

M. Grimblot

Digha Nikiiya wore pubin the " Sept Suttas Palis."

I have consulted the

constituting the text.

MSS.
The

of the individual Nikayas in

translation of the Sutta Nipata

in the "Sacred Books of the given by " East was of great service to me in deciding on the merits

Professor

FausboU

of the various readings.

I have not seen the " Ceylon

Friend," in which the late Rev. D. Gogerly has translated

most

if

not

all

the suttas belonging to the Paritta.

I shall

take an early opportunity of giving a more elaborate account

of the compilation of the book and the different versions

which we have of

it.

The
vacas."

other extracts given are

"A

Collection of

Kammagood

If the Paritta was intended to represent the style

of the Sutta Pitaka, these

may be taken

as a fairly

specimen of the Yinaya Pitaka. I also reserve for a later occasion any mention of the relation of the Kammavacas
to the

Vinaya Pitaka,
to

viz. if

they stand in the same relaas the

tion to the

stands

Mahavagga and Cullavagga The the Sutta Yibhanga.

based on

Patimokkha
the

text of
to

Kam-

mavacas

is

MSS. belonging
2).

the

Bodleian

Library (Pali 1 and

character,

They

are written in the square

and represent the usual Burmese orthography. between linguals and dentals is seldom made, For several nor do they write anusvdm after * and u.

A distinction
chapters

have consulted

other

MSS.

in

the

British

Museum, and some belonging to the Liverpool Free Library. They present the same texts, and are also written in the
Whilst examining the Liverpool Professor with Rhys Davids, to whom company they had been sent by Sir James Allanson Picton for
square painted character.

MSS., in

xii

PREFACE.

identification

and

report,

we found

that one of
it

them (No.

24091) was of especial value, as

contained a few extra

Kammavueas not appearing

given
in

in the usual text

which I have

the Chrestomathy.

Professor Spiegel and Mr.

(see Bibliography).

Dickson have published part of the text

The
in
it

third part contains the Glossary.

all

I have omitted

proper names.

and hyphens I have tried words and simple ones. Compound words ought all to have been given under their last member, as is done in Benfey's
Sanskrit Dictionary.
last

In employing two sorts of type to distinguish between compound

This

is

the only scientific way.

is

The

member

in the

Indo-European languages

explained

by the preceding ones, or as the late Professor Benfey put it in his lectures, " the defining members always precede
the
defined."

But

as

all

the second

members did not

occur in the glossary, I had to give up this plan, and to limit

myself to using
capitals,

italics

however, for

I employ compound words. compound words when the individual

for

meaning of the component parts is another than that of the whole word e. g. addhayogo was printed in capitals for that
;

reason.

I have not attempted to explain the difierent philoI give mostly

sophical terms which occur in the extracts.

one translation, and put a

Fault

1. 1.

(technical term) after them.

may
so

perhaps

be

found with

the

explanation

of

Nihhdnam

as the

summum bonum
it

of the Buddhists;

but

among
to offer

many

different views

seems to

me

best neither

an opinion nor to defend one. I have given the third person singular present of the verb, and translated this throughout with the infinitive.

The
in

third person singular present, as is well

known, has
of

Indian grammar the same value as the infinitive

It is the type given for the verb

modern grammar.

by the

PREFACE.
native grammarians.

xiii

To give the

so-called root did not

commend

itself

to

me

for

two

reasons.

First,

the

principle of

the root- theory has been recently,

it

and not

without reason, greatly shaken, so that

to introduce
it.

would not be wise

determine what
is

Secondly,

it is difficult

to

the root of a Pali word.

I have given the nominative case I

of nouns, and here I think

may

deserve some blame.

shewn in the chapter on declension, through the working of the phonetic laws none of the declensions keeps within its own range, and the crude form of a Pali noun is
But, as
is

thus not easily fixed.

I have availed myself on every occasion of

all

the books

published on Pali grammar, and consulted Childers's Dictionary of the Pali Language. These works will be found
in the appended Bibliography.
larly the works of Professors

name here more

Minayefi",

particu-

Kuhn and

of

M.

Senart, of the Terunnanse Subhuti,

and of Dr. Trenckner.

I hope the Tables of Alphabets will be found useful. In conclusion, I have to thank Dr. Morris for many valuable suggestions, and for his kindness in looking over

the proof-sheets.

am

also indebted to the authorities of

the Bodleian Library, the British

Office

Library,

for

Museum, and the India the courtesy and ready help I have

uniformly received from them.

0.
OxroKD, February, 1883.

FRANKFURTER.

PALI BIBLIOGRAPHY.

I.

PALI LITERATURE.

TuRNOUR, G.

Examination of the Pali Buddhistical Annals.

J.A.S. of Bengal, 1837, 1838.

Westergaard, N. L.
Hardy, Rev. R.
lese
S.

Codices

Indici

bibliothecae

regioe

Havniensis enumerati et descripti.

List of

Copenhagen, 1846.

Languages.

Books in the Pali and SinghaJ.R.A.S. Ceylon Branch, 1848.

Alwis,

J. DE. Descriptive Catalogue of Sanskrit, Pali, and Sinhalese Literary "Works of Ceylon. Colombo, 1870.

Zoysa, L. de.

Catalogue of Pali, Sinhalese, and Sanskrit Manuscripts in the Ceylon Government Oriental Library.

Colombo, 1876.

Forchhammer,
Report
Davids, T.

E., Professor of Pali,

Rangoon High
Pali

School.

by, for the year

1879-1880. on

W.

Rhys.

Report

and Sinhalese.

Transactions of the Philological Society, 1875-1876.

Feer, L.

theque nationale.

Les nouveaux Manuscripts Palis de la biblioAnnales de I'extreme Orient, 1880.

Morris, Rev. Dr. Richard. Report on Piili Literature, Transactions of the Philological Society, 1875-1880. 1881.

Haas, E.
British

Museum.
Co.

Catalogue of Sanskrit and Pali Books in the London, 1876.

Trubner

&

Prakrit, and Buddhist Literature.

Catalogue of leading Books on Pali, London, 1881.

xvi

TALI BIBLIOORAPnY.

II.

TEXTS.
Holy
vols.

ViNAYA PiTAKAM.
Scriptures.

One

of the principal Buddhist

Edited

by Hermann

Oldenbcrg.

London, 1879-1883.

Kammavaca.
Spiegel,

F.

Kammavjikyam,
piilice

liber

de

officiis

buddhicorum
1841.

et lutine edidit.

Bonn,

Chaps, ii, iii. v. 1845. Leipzig, Boehtlingk, 0. Bulletin de I'Academie Imp^riale des Sciences, 1844, No. 22, chap. iv.
Dickson, J. F. Upasampada Kammavaca. J.R.A.S. 1875.

Anecdota Palica.

The Pall Manuscript written on

Papyrus, preserved
in

the
St.

Library of the
Lazaro.
Venice,

Armenian
1875.
preceding.)

Monastery,

(This appears to

be a reprint of the

Patimokkha.
Minayeff, J.

Pratiraoksha Sutra buddijskij sluzebi

niku izdannyj 1869.

perevedennyj.

Petersburg,

Dickson, J. F. Piltlraokkha, being the Buddhist Office of the Confession of Priests. J.R.A.S.

1876.

SUTTA PiTAKAM.

DTOHA NiKAYA.
Qrimblot, P.

Nikaya.
1878.

Sept Suttas Palis, tir^s du Digha Paris, 1876.

Childers, R. C.

Mahaparinibbanasutta.

London,

Mahasatipatthanasutta.

Maulmain, 1881.

PALI BIBLIOGRAPEY.

xvii

SUTTA PlTAKAM.

SaMYUTTA NlKAYA. Feer, H. L. Le Bhikkhuni Samyuttam, M^raoires

de
la

Societe

d'Ethnographie, Sect.

Orient,

1877.

Buddhist Nirvana and the Noble Frankfurter, 0. Eightfold Path. J.R.A.S. 1880.

MaJJHIMA NlKAYA.
Pischel, R.
lated.

A8sala3'anasuttam. Chemnitz, 1880.

Edited and trans-

Anguitara Nikaya.
Morris, Rev. Dr. R.
Society.

Publications of the Pali Text

Khuddaka Nikaya.
FausboU, y.
mentary. 1879.
etc.

The Jataka, together with

Vols.
i.

its

Com-

and

ii.

London, 1877,

Two

Jatakas

the original Pali text,

London. Five Jatakas.

Copenhagen, 1861.

Ten Jatakas, Copenhagen, 1872. The Dasaratha Jataka. Copenhagen,

1874.
Zachariae,

Th.

Die sechszehnte Erzahlung des

Contains
iv. p.

Vetalapaucaviri9ati.
dantl-jataka.

the

Umma-

B.B.

375.

"Weber, A., and Fausboll, V. Entstehung des Sakya

schlechtes.

und

Die Sage von der Koliya Gei.

Indische

Streifen

Berlin,

1868.
Fausboll, V.

Dhammapadam, ex
Palice
edidit.

tribus codicibus

Havniensibus
1855.
Childers,

Copenhagen,
with English
1845.

R. C.
F.

Khuddaka

Piitha,

translation, etc.

J.R.A.S. 1870.
Palica.

Spiegel,

Anecdota

Leipzig,

Contains the Uragasutta of the Sutta Nipata.

xviii

TALI BIBLIOGRAPHY.

SUTTA PlTAKAM.

Khuddaka Nikaya.
Colombo, 1871. Alwis, J. de. Buddhist Nirvana. Contains extracts from the Sutta Nipata.
Morris, Rev. R.

Cany a

Pitaka.
(Publications of

Buddhavamsa.
the
Feer,
Piili

Text Society.)
11 livraisons.

Textes tir^s du Kandjour. Paris, 1864-1871.

H. L.

J. Ajjhatta Jaya Mangalam. Rangoon, 1881. Grimblot, P. Extraits du Paritta, texte et commentaire, avec introduction, traduction, notes et notices par L^on

Gray,

Feer.

J.A. 1871.
Fft\ides

Feer, H. L.
Pirit Pota

{i.e.

Buddhiques. J.A. 1870, etc. Colombo, 2411 (1869). Paritta).

Rangoon, 1879. Mahaparitto. Rangoon, 1881. Mangalasutta. 2nd ed. Rangoon, 1881.
Mahaparitto.

Mahavamso.

In Pali and English, with an Introductory Vol. i. on Pali Buddhistical Literature. By Essay Q. Tumour. Colombo, 1837. From the 37th Chapter. Translated and edited H. Sumangala and Don Andris de Silva Batuwantuby dawa. 2 vols. Colombo, 1877. DiPAVAMSA. A Buddhist Historical Record. Edited, with an English translation, by H. Oldenberg. London, 1879. The Dathavamsa, the Pali text and its Dhammakitti.
translation into English.

By Mutu Coomdra Swamy.

Trans-

London, 1874.

Hatthavanagallavamsa.
lated from the Pali

The Attanagalluvansa.
J. d* Alwis,

by

with the Pali text.

Colombo, 1866.

MiLiNDAPANHO. Being Dialogues between King Milinda Edited by V. and the Buddhist Sage Nagasena. Trenckner. London, 1880.

PALI BIBLIOGRAPHY.

xlx

III.

TRANSLATIONS.

Clough, Rev. B. The Ritual of the Buddhist Priesthood. Translated from the original Pali work entitled Karmavakya (Miscellaneous Translations from Oriental "Writers,
vol.
ii.

Beal, Rev.

S.,

London, 1834). and Gogerly, Rev. D.

of

J.

Arrangement
Davids, T.

Two

Translations of

the"

Comparative Buddhist

Ritual for the Priesthood.

London, 1862.

Rhys, and Oldenberg, H. Vinaya Texts. Part I. The Piitimokkha the Mahiivagga. Oxford, 1881. (Sacred Books of the
Translated from the Pali.
;

W.

East, vol.

xiii.)

Davids, T.

W. Rhys. Buddhist Suttas. Oxford, 1881. (Sacred Books of the East, vol. xi. Contains the Mahaparinibbtina Sutta, the Tevijja Sutta, the Mahasudassana
Sutta, the

Dhammacakkappavattana
Buddhist Birth

Sutta, the Sabba-

sava Sutta.)
Stories, or

Jataka

Tales.

London, 1880.

Weber, A.

Dhammapadam

(Indische Streifen).

MtJLLER, F. Max.

Buddha's Dhammapada. Translated from Pali. (Buddhaghosha's Parables. Translated from Burmese by H. T. Rogers. London, 1870.)

Dhammapada
translated

from

Pali.

Oxford, 1881.
1.)

a Collection of Verses, (Sacred Books of

the East, vol. x. part

Hu, Ferd.

Dhammapadam

traduit en Fran9ais, avec intro-

duction et notes.

Paris, 1878.

SwAMY, Sir M. Coomara. Sutta Nipata, or the Dialogues Translated from the Pali, with of Gotama Buddha.
Introduction and Notes.

London, 1874.
;

Faxjsboll, V. The Sutta Nipata

translated from Pali.

a Collection of Discourses, Oxford, 1881. (Sacred Books of

the East, vol. x. part

2.)

XX
IV.

PALI BIBLIOGRAPnT.

DICTIONARIES, GRAMMARS, GRAMMATICAL PAPERS.

etc.

AND

MoGOALLANA Thero.
Subhuti.

Abhidlulnappadlpiku, with English

and Sinhalese Interpretations,

Colombo, 1865. Childers, R. C.

By Waskaduwe

Dictionary of the Pali Language. London, 1875. Clough, B. a Compendious Pali Grammar, with a Copious Vocabulary in the same Language. Colombo, 1824.

BuKNouF,
1826.

E.,

and Lassen, Chr.

Essai sur le Pali.

Paris,

Observations grammaticales sur quelques de I'essai sur le Pali. Paris, 1827. passages nominum in lingua Piilica. declinatione "W. De Storck,
Berlin, 1858.

Casuum
1862.

in lingua Palica formatio.

Miinster,

MiJLLER, F.
Vols.
i.

Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Pali Sprache. Vienna, 1867-1869. MiNAYEFF, J. Gram'maire Palie, traduite par St. Guyard. Paris, 1874.
ii. iii.

KuHN,

E.

W. A.

ToRP, A,

Beitrage zur Pali Grammatik. Berlin, 1875. Die Flexion des Pali in ihrem Verhaltnis zum
Christiania, 1881.

Sanskrit.

Trenckner, V.
GoLDSCHMiDT,
S.

Pali Miscellany.
Prukritica.

Vol.

i.

London, 1879.

Strassburg, 1879.

BIlavataro.
Kaccayana.
Alwis,

Pandita Devarakkhitacariyena Samsodhito.

Colombo, 1869* [2412 a.b.].

J. de.

of the Pali Language.

Introduction to Kaccayana's Colombo, 1863.

Grammar
specimen.

KuHN,

E.

W.

A.

Kaccayanappakaranae

Halle, 1869.

specimen
alterum.
Halle, 1871.

TALI BIBLIOGRAPHY.

xxi

Kaccayana.

The Piili Text of Kachcliayano's Graraniar, with English Annotations. Toongoo, 1871. Senart, E. Kaccayana et la litterature grammaticale du Pali, l"* Partie. Paris, 1871.
Mason, F.
SIlavamsa.
Kaccayana's Dhatumanjusa. Edited, with a translation in Sinhalese and English, by Devarakkhita.

Colombo, 1872.
Naraamala, or a "Work on Pali

Waskaduwe

Subhuti.

Ceylon, 1876. Sumangala. Declension and Conjugation of Pali "Words. Edited by M. Gunaratana. Ceylon, 1873. Sangharakkhita Thera. Subodhalahkara. (Pali Studies,

Grammar.

by Major G. E. Fryer.)
lation

Calcutta, 1875.

"Vuttodaya.

and

notes, by Major G. E. Fryer.

Edited, with transCalcutta, 1877.

Yuttodaya, die Pali Metrik des

herausgegeben
tiques, vi.

von

J.

Minayeff.

Melanges
J.R.A.S.

Asia-

Childers, R. C.
p. 309.

On

Sandhi in Pali.

n.s.

iv.

in Pali. K.B. viii. p. 150. The Prakrit Dekkh. K.B. vii. p. 450. Die wurzeln ^pekkh, dakkh und dekkh PiscHEL, R. K.B. vii. p. 453. Prakrit. "Weber, A. Zur Yerstiindigung. K.B. vii. p. 458.

Dakkh

in

PiscHEL, R.
Jacobi,

H.

Zur Paligrammatik. K.Z. xxiii. p. 423. Vocaleinschub in Pali. K.Z. xxiii. p. 594.
K.Z. xxv.

ZiMMER, H. Zur Paligrammatik. K.Z. xxiv. p. 220. Oldenberq, H. Bemerkungen zur Paligrammatik.
XXV. p. 314.

GoLDscHMiDT,

S.

Priikritische

Miscellen.

K.Z.

Z.D.M.G. xxxii. p. 99. pp. 436, 610. PiscHEL, R. Pali acchati. B.B. iii. p. 155.
Die
p. 255.

de9lcabdas

bei

Trivikrama.

B.B.

iiL

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS.

abl.=: ablative.

= accusative. = adj. adjective. adv. = adverb.

ace.

p. p. p.

= participle of the per-

fect passive.

par.=para8mai.

aor.=aori8t.

= particle. = passive. pass.

part.

attn.=atmane.
caus.

= causative.
= con junction.

pers.= person.

pe=peyyalo,

etc.

comp., cp.=eompare. cond. =conditional.

conj.

dat.= dative.

= fem. foil. = following. fr. = from. fut. = future. gen. = genitive. ger. = gerund. Imperat. = Imperative. inf. = infinitive. instr. = instrumental.
f.

= plural. pi. = preposition. prep. = present. pres. = preterite. pret. = separately. sep. sing. = singular.
t.t.= technical term.

voc.= vocative.
J. A.

J. II. A. S.

= Journal Asiatique. = Journal of

the

Royal
B. B.

= Bezzenberger,

Asiatic Society.
bei-

trage sur kunde der indo-

loc.=locative.

= masculine. n. = neuter. num. = numeral. = optative. opt. p. = participle p.

m.
f.

K.B. = Kuhn's Beitrage.

germanischen sprachen.
zeitschrift fiir

K.Z =Kuhn*8
schung. Z. D. M. G.

vergleichende
of

sprachford.

the

= Zeitschrift

future passive,
p. p.

deutschen

= participle present.

morgenlan-

dischen gesellschaft.

HANDBOOK OF
PART
I.

PALI.

AN ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR.
1.

THE ALPHABET.

Pali, the sacred language of the Buddhists, is written, according to the countries from which the MSS. come, either
in

(Ceylon), Burmese (Burma), or Karabodian characters. The system of writing in the original (Siam) characters is syllabic and consonantal (as will be seen from

Sinhalese

the appended table). To transliterate these characters the following system

is

now mostly adopted Vowels

:

u u
urn

j
d d
b
I

{I)

gh jh dh
dh
hh
V

n
n
(/h)

n
n

2.

PRONUNCIATION.
The

The vowels

are pronounced in the Continental way.

short a has mostly the indistinct sound as in English hut. The uasal vowels are now pronounced in Ceylon and Burma
1

2
like

PALI GRAMMAR.
the
guttural nasal

e and o are in English hang. before two short but pronounced metrically always long,

consonants.

The consonants
c is

are pronounced in the

manner known from

Sanskrit grammar.

English ch. is the Spanish

is

ti

and French ng

in campagne.

pronounced as English or French v, except when preceded by a consonant in the same syllable, in which case
V

has the sound of English w. The aspirated letters, surd and sonant, are pronounced as the corresponding non-aspirates followed by /*. The sound of the nasal is defined by the letter which
it

follows

it, cf.

English hang, hand, bench, hemp.

3.

CLASSIFICATION OF LETTERS.
:

All the vowels and consonants are arranged by the native

grammarians under the following classes 1) a k kh g gh h and h are considered gutturals (kanthaja). 2) t c chjjh n and y are termed palatals {tdluja). 3) u p ph h bh m are termed labials {oHhaja). 4) t th d (/) dh (Ih) n r are termed linguals {muddhaja)} 5) t th d dh n I are termed dentals {dantaja). 6) e is termed gutturo-palatal [kaiithatdluja). is termed gutturo-labial {kantkoUhaja). 7) is termed dento-labial (dantolthqja) V 8)
.t

% 4.

VOWELS.
dialects, is best con-

1) Pali

being one of the Indian

sidered in comparison with one of those dialects of which the grammar is already firmly established, viz. Sanskrit.
In the Sacred Books of the East, edited by Prof. Max Miiller, the palatals are printed, like gutturals, in italics, and the cerebrals likewise as dentals in k kh g gh n, t th d dh n. italics, thus that the palatals arise always from the This transliteration seems to
:

imply

the linguals stand to gutturals, and that they stand in the same relation to these as This is, howerer, not the case in Pali. the dentals. in this handbook is used in most of the texts published up to The

system adopted the present time, such as Dr. Oldenbcrg's edition of the Vinayapi^aka, Prof. Fausbiill's Jataka, and also in Childers's Dictionary of the Pali Language.

SHORT VOWELS.

2) In comparing Piili with Sanskrit forma, it must always be kept in mind that Sanskrit is not to be regarded as the parent language but as the dialect which best represents
:

the primitive Aryan speech, to which Sanskrit and Pali stand in the relation of elder and younger sisters.

In comparing the Pali vowels with those of Sanskrit, we no written characters for the r and / vowels. It has not the diphthongs ai au, and lacks the long nasal
find that Pali has

vowels.

We find therefore in

Pali three short vowels a

u,

and

five

long vowels a I u e o, and three nasal vowels am hn urn, which are also considered long, and which are technically called
niggahlta.

As to the accent, which plays such a conspicuous part in Vedic Sanskrit, no accented texts have been handed down.
It
is,

however, clear that

Pali

possessed

free

accent

just as much as Sanskrit, and every other Aryan language. It is now the fashion in Ceylon and Burma to give the accent
to the

long syllable in every word.

is

syllable of the long,

considered long,

if it

or nasal

vowels, or a

contains one short vowel

followed by two consonants.

only end in a vowel or nasal vowel. For exceptions see the chapter on Sandhi.

Pali word

may

5.

SHORT VOWELS.

In comparing the Pali vowels with those of Sanskrit, it will be seen that the short vowels a i u correspond as a rule to
those of Sanskrit.

A
*

short vowel followed

;

a Sanskrit long vowel

'

thus

by two consonants corresponds to we have maggo Skr. nijirga

:

' * ratti Skr. ratri night' path ; majjdro Skr. miirjara cat ' saddhim Skr. sardham * with ; ikkhati Skr. Ikshati * to
; ;

'

look

*
;

kitti

Skr. kirti

place*; ' ' urine

t//<!^^o
;

fame tittham Skr. tirtha landingSkr. dhurta 'gamester'; mutlam Skr. mutra
;

'

'

suttam Skr. sutra.

PALI GRAMMAB.

An original long vowel following a simple consonant can arbitrarily be shortened by doubling the consonant. This seems only to be graphic, as in the metre no difference is made between a form hahunnam and bahunam, gen. plur.
m. and n. of ba/iu much,' or al/dpo and d/dpo 'speech.' In the gen. plur. m. and n. of the numerals tinnam pahcannam channam the forms with doubled nasals are in use.
'

The
given

syllable
is

ya

is

changed

to

i.

Among

nigrodho for Skr.

nyagrodha, majjhimo

the examples for Skr.

madhyarad. The process called samprasarana. In the same way va is contracted into u in such words as
latukikd Skr. latvakii
*

quail.'

Pali has, as was shown above, no written character corresponding to the Sanskrit r and / vowels.
6.

It is a well-known fact that those two vowels originate in Sanskrit and other languages for the most part through the abbreviation of a syllable which contains an r or /through

the influence of the accent. Theoretically, therefore, one would expect

to find in Pali

a short syllable containing an r or / element. This r or I find a whole element may be inherent in the vowel.

We

syllable with the consonant r to represent the Sanskrit vowel.

r,

practically speaking, therefore,

is

represented in Pali by

one of the short vowels a i u or by the consonant r in conjunction with one of the vowels a i m, which in this case are
vowel fractures (svarabhakti). There is no fixed rule for the use of these vowels, and in difierent, sometimes in the same, texts, they are used inand the divergency diflferently in the case of the same word,
in the use of these vowels shows that they were employed in a merely tentative way to indicate the sound in writing. * krta made ; gmihdti Skr. grhnuti * to 1) a=r in kato Skr. * ' ' ianhTt Skr. trshna lust.' seize ; mato Skr. mrtd dead
' ' ;

2) i=^r in

done'
3)
'

Skr. rshi *a sage' ; kicco Skr. krtyd what is to be ' * ' pitthatn pitlhl Skr. prshtha back ; inam Skr. rn4 debt.'
isi

'

M=r
r=r

in samvitto Skr. saravrtd 'restrained'; uju Skr. rjd in iritvyo Skr. ytvij *a priest'; iru Skr. re

straight.'

4)

'hymn';

LONG VOWELS.
bi'uheti
*
'

6
'
;

Skr.
;

great
5)

r=

to increase brmbayati ruhkho Skr. vrkshd tree.' or i or u in the same word :

*

hrohd Skr. brh&nt

antelope ; accho ikko Skr. rksha 'bear*; pathavi put hurl Skr. prthivi 'earth'; sati sainuti Skr. ' smrti * thought ; vuddhi vaddhi Skr. vrddhi * increase.'
niigo

mago Skr. mrga

'

The long r vowel is of later development in Sanskrit, and has therefore no equivalent in Pali. The so-called root klip, the only one which contains an
vowel, in Sanskrit becomes kappati. 7. In comparing Pali words with corresponding Sanskrit, in several instances a difference in the vowels is to be found.
/

This
tion.

is

and the reason

both vowels.

generally the case in unaccented syllables, for such a practice lies in assimilaIn several instances, however, words are used with
* '
; ;

mind pana puna Skr. punar puriso ucchu Skr. ikshu sugar-cane.' puruso Skr. purusha 'man Pukkuso Skr. Pukka9a Kondantio Skr. Kaundinya
muti mati Skr. mati
'
' ; ;

candimd Skr. candramas

'

moon

'
;

saddhim Skr. sardham

'

' to dislike ; timisam tamisam jigucchati Skr. jugupsati ' * Skr. tamisra darkness ; Timingalo Titnihgilo Skr. Timingila ;

nitthuhhati
lindo
*

nutthubhati Skr. nishthiv

'

to spit out

' ;

muca-

Skr.
'
;

mucilinda

a tree

'
;

dyasma

Skr.
'

ayushmant
family.'

venerable

kutumbam kutitnbam Skr. kutumba

Where a difference in the vowel takes place in conjunction with one of the semivowels or nasals, the vowels only designate a partial vowel, such as in garu Skr. guru, Greek ^apv,
8.

LONG VOWELS.

i u agree with the corresponding with the Sanskrit, exception above stated, that a long vowel followed by two consonants is represented in Pali by a short one.

The long vowels a

1)

a:

d=a
*

'the prep.' sddhu Skr. sadhu 'good'; data

Iti
'

Skr. datr
2) T
:

giver.'
iti

Skr.

calamity

gltam Skr. gita

a song

' ;

j'nitam Skr. jivita 'life.'

6
3) u
:

TALI GRAMMAR.

&no Skr.
'

iina

'

deficient

*
;

8upo Skr. supa

broth

'
;

mulho Skr. mudha foolish.* 9. The long vowels e and o correspond to the Skr. diphthongs e and o, and sometimes to the diphthongs ai an.

They combine
they go back
consonant.
1)

therefore

guna and vrddhi of

and

u,

and

to these

vowels accordingly, before a compound

e:

eti
'

Skr. eti 'he goes'; ekam Skr. eka 'one'; hetu

' '

Skr. hetu

cause.*
;

contemptible goes back to jigucchd ' suffering from a cutaneous complaint to kilaso. ediso eriso edikkho erikkho such to idam.
jeguccho
* '

keldso

gelanfiam 'sickness' to gildno, in which, however, the

is

svarabhakti for Skr. gluna.

2)

E=Skr.

ai

Eravano Skr. AirJivana.

etihyam Skr. aitihya traditional instruction.' ekdgdriko Skr. aikjigarika a thief.'
* '

3) aya

is
'

contracted to e in the
'
;

middle of a word
'

katheti=

kathayati

to relate

jeti^-jayati

to conquer.'

4) e arises out the contraction of avi in e.g. thero Skr.

sthavira
1) o:
'

an

elder.*

lobho

okam Skr. okas 'a house'; ojo Skr. ojas 'splendour'; covetousness from luhhati Skr. lobha to be greedy
' '

'

tnoho Skr.

moho
;

'

delusion

'
;

doso Skr. dosha

to

'

blemish.*
person,*

'

pothujjaniko

belonging
latter
is

an
for

unconverted
Skr. prthak.

puthujjano

this

stands

form

puthujjaniko, however,
2)

also given.

o=Skr. au
Skr.

opammam

aupamya 'comparison.' ' orahbhiko Skr. aurabhrika a shepherd.' odariko and odaro Skr. audiirika ' greedy.'
3) ava is contracted to o in the
fuller
'

beginning of a word

the

form
'
;

descent

almost always also in use: otdro and avatdro okdro avakdro * vileness.'
is

sometimes arises from the vocalisation of v and its 4) combinations with d as hoti=.bhavati and dhovati Skr.
\/dhav
'

to wash.'

CONSONANTS.

10.

THE NASAL VOWELS.

nasal of every class, if preceded by a vowel, may arbitrarily become niggahlta. They correspond in every
respect to Sanskrit. For a nasalized vowel, a simple long one can be substituted: nho ' lion ' for Skr. simha tlsati Skr. vim9ati. sam very
;

The

often becomes sa

' sdrdgo possessed of passion.* Every one of the five nasals can, before any other consonant or nasal, become niggahlta. The MSS. vary greatly
:

other,' pamha, and In cases the long pofiha panha 'question.' very many vowel and the nasalized vowel appear in the same word. In later texts a short vowel is often nasalized nagaram becomes nahgaram. This seems, however, a mistake of the
:

in the expression of the nasals

'

mn/io, anno,

Sinhalese copyists.
11.

INTERCHANGE OF VOWELS.

the side of hhlyo bhiyi/oz^Skr. bhuyas we find yehlmyyo yehhuyo, which is a contraction of yad+ bhuyas.

By

Skr. a appears as u in the last part of such compounds as addhagu katannu, which stand respectively for Skr. adhvaga

and krtajiia. In merayam 'intoxicating liquor,' Skr. maireya, second e appears in Pali as a. In milakkJw Skr. mleccho the Pali It stands for mlaska. preserves the older form. We sometimes find the gunated forms of words in Pali by
the side of Sanskrit ungunated.
12.

CONSONANTS.
*
:

The consonants
into ghosavd
*

Ghosava
y, r,
/,

by the native grammarians and aghosd surd.' They are sounding,' d, dh^ n d, dh, n b, bh, m g, gh, h j, jh, n
\

are divided

V, h.
:

Aghosa k^ kh c, cA The simple consonants

;

t, th ; t, th\ p, ph ; 8. of Piili mostly agree with those of

Sanskrit and the other Indo-European languages.

TALI GRAMMAR.

The
Pali.

as the semivowels

Gutturals, Palatals, Linguals, Dentals, Labials, as well and and /t, correspond in Sanskrit and

Piili possesses all the consonants of Sanskrit, with the exception of the palatal and lingual sibilant; the last of which is even in Sanskrit of late origin, and occurs only in the numeral

8h(Vih

and its derivatives, and in a few words in conjunction with the linguals according to phonetic rules. The dental takes the place of the three sibilants of Sanskrit. sibilant
*
'

However, the aspirated surd palatal is found in, eg. chokam Skr. 9akrt dung chdpo Skr. yava young of an chavo Skr. 9ava a corpse.* animal Skr. shash, which goes back to a form svaks, is represented in Pali by the form cha and chal.
*
;

'

% 13.

PHONETIC CHANGES.
;

grammar they only take place optionally, and can scarcely be called conIn most instances the leading motive for the change sistent.
euphony or false analogy in many instances also two forms occur, of which one preserves intact the form known
is
;

None

of the changes pervades the whole

from Sanskrit grammar.

General Remarks.
1)

For Skr. mleccha

form
is

Piili

has milakkho *a stranger.*

Here

the
*

Piili

the older one, just as in bhhakko Skr. bhishaj

physician.'
2) Palatals, in conjunction with become sometimes dentals,

one of the semivowels

y, V,

3) Cerebrals /, M, can optionally be substituted for d, dh, in the middle of a word between vowels, the difference only

being graphic,
'

e.g.
* *

khiddd kild Skr. krTda

foolish
' ;

play
*

mulho mudho Skr.

mudha

dalho Skr. drdha

firm.'
r,

4)

Through the
/*,

influence of
* ;

vowel or consonant, and

cerebrals, e.g.
*

and

the dentals are sometimes

*

made

dahali Skr. v/dah

to

burn

daddho Skr. dagdhd

burnt.*

PHONETIC CHANGES.
ha to Skr. hrtd
*

9
*

seized

' ;

pati Skr. prati

*

to.'

upaft/idpanam Skr. upastliiipana providing.* 5) l=:d is substituted sometimes for n, e.g. muldlo Skr.

mrnala
6)

lotus-fibre

An

venu bamboo.' interchange between d and r takes places,

;

'

vein venu Skr.

e.g.

in

ekdddsa ekdrasa

'

eleven

' ;

ediso eriso

such.'
for the

7) The mutes of one class are occasionally used mutes of another Pakudho and Kakudho. kipiUiko and kipi/lako Skr. pipllika ant.'
:

gadduhano Skr. dadrughna good for leprosy.* takkollam Skr. kakkola bdellium.'
'

samputito sahkutito sahkucito

'shrivelled';
cikicchati

from Skr.
*

y/

kut or

\/

kuc

and

tikicchali Skr.

cikits

'to care';

jighncchd dighacchd Skr. jighatsa

8)

hunger.'
:

For sonants the surds appear

pdtu Skr. priidur (in comp.). ' akildsu Skr. aglasnu healthy.*
chakalo Skr. chagala a he-goat.* palikho paligho Skr. parigha 'an iron beam.*
' mudihgo mutihgo Skr. mrdanga a kettle-drum.* thakam Skr. sthagana covering.'
'
'

chdpo Skr. 9a va young of an animal.' paldpo Skr. palava chafi*,' perhaps through tbe influence
*

'

of paldpo Skr. pralapa

avdpiirati

nonsense.'
'

and apdpurati Skr. ava-j- \/vr to open.' Several derivatives of sad show t in the place of d. 9) An interchange between surd and sonants takes
place, e.g.:

Sdgald Skr. Qiikala dumb.'

elamugo Skr, edamuka

'

deaf and

Nighandu Skr. Nighantu. For the cerebral t in such instances

dlaviko Skr. iitavika
'

appears,
'
;

e.g.

dwelling in forests cakkabdio for Skr. cakraviita and cakrabala.

10)

cakkavdlam and

We find v interchanged with p

This
last
'

in the

same word, and

e.g.

vice versd.

change seems only graphic, kavi kapi Skr. kapi a monkey.'

10
11)

TALI GRAMMAR.

takes place sometimes between the sonant which the aspirate h is substituted. lahu laghu Skr. laghu light holi by the side of hhacati but also idha and iha for Skr. iha hither,' Skr. bhavati where the original form is, perhaps, preserved in Piili. 12) n and / are frequently interchanged in Piili, e.g.
aspirates, for
* ' ; '

A change

nahgalarfi lahgalam Skr. liingala *a plough'; pilandhanam Skr. pinaddha ' an ornament.'

Semivowels.
1)

is

inserted in a

word
to eat

to avoid hiatus after a

e.g.

consonant

has been elided between two vowels,

khadati Skr. v/khad svadate * to taste.'
' '
;

khdyito P.P.P. from sdyaniyo from sdyati for Skr.

For the same reason it appears as if y was interchangeable with V in such words as dniso voc. to ayasma, where it stands
for duso.

y is interchangeable with r in antardrati and antardyati ' run into danger Skr. antaraya danger, impediment nahdru Skr. snayu * a sinew.' 3) r is interchangeable with /, e.g. taluno taruno Skr. taruna
2)
*

to

'

tender

'
;

cattalisam cattarlmm

Skr.

'

further in some of the numerals where

d, telasa terasa

catvarira9at forty ; r is interchanged with

and

corresponds to Skr. jariiyu

tedasa Skr. trayoda^an 'thirteen.' jaldbu 'womb'; halidydhho haliddo and

hari correspond to Skr. haridrabha and hari * yellow.' 4) Purindado, an epithet of Indra, corresponds to a Skr.

Purandara, the change being due to

in.

false

etymology, just as

palihodha 'obstacle,' where two roots have been confounded. 5) For /, r is substituted occasionally, and the former is kira Skr. kila they say generally the original sound
'

'

drammanam
'

Skr. iilambana

'

support, basis

*
;

arahjaro Skr.
'

alinjara

waterpot.'
/

6)

We find

for Skr.

in

bubbulam budbuda

a bubble.'

Nasals.

The MSS. greatly vary

in the expression of the nasals.

No

fixed rules can therefore be given, as also the native

COMPOUND CONSONANTS.
grammarians are which then
is

at

variance
r,

in
s

however, be stated that

h and

this respect. It may, cerebralize a dental nasal,

interchangeable with the palatal nasal.

14.

COMPOUND CONSONANTS.

In the beginning of every Pali word only vowels, simple

consonants, or consonants in conjunction with the semivowels means of eflfecting y, V, r, occur. Assimilation is the commonest
this change.

This assimilation, of course, considerably alters the shape of a word, and therefore, when a word commences with a vowel or simple consonant in Sanskrit, in Pali also

a vowel or simple consonant appears; whereas, if a double consonant, otherwise than in conjunction with y, r, v, commences a word, the corresponding word in Pali takes a
different form.

The same

rules

which apply

to the

also apply to the

middle of a word.

beginning of a word Here, also, conjunct

consonants, belonging to different classes, are avoided through the help of assimilation, or through the insertion of a vowel.

The

as well as to the middle,

rules of assimilation apply to the beginning of a word and if, at the beginning of a word,

a simple consonant is exhibited, the word takes in composition always the two sounds from which the simple sound
originated. The chief rule for assimilation
the
is

is,

that of two consonants

The two former entirely assimilated to the latter. the one was a the other a are assimilated sounds, if sonant, surd,
(viz.

the final letter

is

a perfect assimilation
are not only

takes place,

assimilated to the following initial) ; so that the two sounds

made
In
is

to

belong to

same order.
these processes

Piili itself it will

one class, but also to the be sufl&cient if the last of

common with

pointed out, as the first has taken place in other Indian dialects, anterior to the

fixing of the Pali language. A second means of avoiding conjunct consonants was the insertion of a vowel between two letters. This could only

12
take place

TALI GRAMMAR.

when one

in either of

of the letters was a semivoicel or a nasal, which the part of a vowel (svarabhakti) is

already inherent.
It remains

now

to consider the Phonetic changes

itself
:

which

tuke place in the word

1) It is self-evident that when two consonants belonging to the same class meet together, they are preserved intact, e.g.
cittani Skr. citta
*

'

mind, thought
food..'

lajjd

Skr. lajja

shame

annam Skr. anna

2)

'

Mutes + Mutes are Assimilated.

k + t =tt
k-{-th=ztth

lattakam Skr. laktaka *a red dye'; wM/^d Skr. ' raukta 'pearl ; mutto Skr. mukta * released.'
sittham Skr.

siktha

'bee's

wax';

satthi Skr.

sakthi

thigh.'

g-\-dh=.ddh duddho Skr. dugdha 'milked.* g-\-hh=.bhh pahbharo Skr. pragbhara *a cave.* * sagguno Skr. sadguna good quality d-\-g ^=gg
'

'
;

puggalo

Skr, pudgala individual.* d-\-gh=:.ggh ugghoso Skr. udghosha 'proclamation'; uggharati Skr. ud+ \/ghr ' to open.'
d-\-h

=^bb

bubbulam Skr. budbuda 'a bubble.*

abbhufo Skr. adbhuta 'wonderful, mysterious.* ' tatfo Skr. tapta burnt.'
khvjjo Skr. kubja 'limping,* saddo Skr. 9abda ' sound.' laddho Skr. labdha ' taken.*

d-\-bh = bbh p-\-t =U

b-\-j

=^jj

b'\-d =.dd

b+dh=ddh

3)
ASSIMILATION.

Mutes + Nasals.
SVAKABIIAKTI.

k k

\-n

sakkoti

sakunati Skr. 9aknoti

able.*

to

be

+m
+n

rumma
naggo
*

rukuma Skr. rukma

Skr.
'

gold.*

nagnd
aggini gini Skr. agni
* '

naked

aggi

fire.*

gh

4-

n agghd Skr. aghnat

kiUing.'

not

SEMIVOWELS.
A8SIMILATI0IT.

13
STAKABHAKTI.

+n

fl'ww Skr. ajnji.

fidti

'command.'
*

Skr. jfiati

kinsman.'

d
t

{m

kudumalo Skr. kudmala *an

opening bud.'
Skr.

sappatto
'

sapatna

hostile.'

ratanam Skr. ratna

gahapatdnl
*

jewel.'

Skr.
*

grhapatnl
self.'

housewife.'

+m th + n
t
rf

attd

atumd Skr. atman

Skr.

mattho
*

mathna

shaking.'

+m

chaddam Skr. chadman

'

roof.'

padumam
wood.'

Skr.

padma
idhma

lotus.'
*

dh-\-m

idhumam Skr.
pappoti
pdpiinati

fire-

-^-n

Skr.

prapnoti

he

obtains.'

4) Nasal + surd remains mostly unchanged. * However, by the side of amhd Skr. amba mother,' we have amwd, and by the side of paaca five,' paJihdsa and pamidsa Skr. panca9at fifty,' where the nn is probably due
'
*

to the influence of

s.
*

Further,
*

hhdjiako

'

jar

by

the

side

of

hhandaham

a utensil

'

Skr. bhanda.
to the second, eg.
:

6) Of two nasals the first is assimilated ninnam Skr. nirana 'depth.'

jammam

Skr.

janman

'birth.'

Semivowels.
6)

No fixed

labials,

and the

rules can be given, y, after gutturals, palatals, sibilant s, is either preserved or assimilated,

alwaj's so that the semivowel is assimilated to the preceding consonant (not as is the case with mutes in conjunction with

mutes where the first sound is assimilated to the second) or a vowel is inserted between the mutes and the semivowel.

An

example will suffice Sdkiyo Sakyo Sakko Skr. Qilkya.

:

14

PALI GRAMMAR.

7) j is made through the influence of // arbitrarily a dental * in dosino ISkr. jyotsnii a moonlit night,* but we have also * junhd ; daddallati Skr. jiijvalyate to blaze.*

a bowstring.* preposition abhi before vowels becomes ahhha. Is gheppati pass, to have, of course, simple assimilation. *= take Skr. *to grbhyate? Vgrah
jijd eindjif/d Skr.

jya

8)

The

We

9)

In conjunction with the

*

sibilants

we have
*

dlasiyani diasyam dlassam Skr. alasya

sdlo Skr. 9yala

sloth.*

brother-in-law.*

10)

The

dentals in conjunction with

y are

palatalized or

kept
c

intact.

and ch sometimes represent the surd dentals when followed by y and j, and j'h, the sonant dentals in conjunction with
y.

The dental nasal

-\-y Ib

also palatalized,

becoming

tiFi.

The preposition adhi before vowels becomes aj'/ha ; ati in ' form atyappo, is the same way ace iti thus becomes ice.
' ;

of frequent occurrence, this form, however, only shows i=^y before a vowel.

Other examples are ' saceo Skr. satya true paecmo Skr. pratyiisha dawn majjam Skr. madya strong cdgo Skr. tyaga abandoning Skr. drink'; majjho madhya 'middle*; hnjjo Skr. hrdya 'dear.* in conjunction with y, is either assimilated or both 11) r, If letters are preserved intact with intervening vowel.
:

'

'

assimilation takes place, r is always assimilated to y, thus we find yy, not rr, which never occurs in Pali.
' Cpr. ariyo and ayyo Skr. arya and arya noble.* * bhariyd and hhayyd Skr. bhiirya wife.'
* kdn'yo and kayyo Skr. karya that ought to be done.* 12) In a few instances r+y is assimilated to //, as in ' pallahko Skr. paryanka couch.*

is either preserved or y kalldno Skr. kalyuna and kalydno an arrow mllo Skr. 5alya

13) l-\-y

is
'

assimilated to /=//.
*

fortunate.*

'

nallako

Skr.

9alyaka

porcupine.*
is

14) v-\-y is difierently treated if in the middle of a word.

it

begins a word or

if it

SEMIVOWELS.
vy,

15

according to Burmese and Siamese manuscripts, becomes hy, whilst the Sinhalese write vy throughout at the beginning of a word, vydmo or hydmo Skr. vyama *a fathom.'

This

is

often assimilated to v

In the middle of a word

with assimilation
hb, or,

vdio Skr. vyala snake.' it is either written 6y, ty, or

From
*

kavi *a wise

though less frequently, yy. man, a poet,' kahbam and kavyam Skr.

kavya
*

poetry.' pattabbo, but also pattayyo attainable.'

and pattabyo Skr. praptavya

preposition vi becomes by before vowels. r, the metathesis vh 15) h-\-y appears as yh, just as for A takes place. Besides this, we have assimilation and svarabhakti.

The

asayho Skr. asahya

unendurable.'
'

The
lick
' ;

participle P.P.

from

lehati is

leyyo Skr.
*

lehya

to

hiyo

and hiyyo

appear for Skr. hyas

16)
;*

yesterday.*

and the

before gutturals, palatals, cerebrals, dentals, labials sibilant s is mostly assimilated.

*

saggo Skr. svarga

*

heaven
'

'
;

an oblong pond ; digghikd kakkatako Skr. karkataka * a crab.'

*

* dlgho Skr. dirgha long,' but ' * maggo Skr. marga path ;

In sakkhard Skr. 9arkara

a potsherd,' we find aspiration.

accati Skr. -v/arc
*

to

honour
*

'

tude
'free

' ;

maijdro Skr. marjiira

* ajjavam Skr. arjava rectia cat nijjaro Skr. nirjara

; * ;

from decay';
*

Skr. Vgarj
*

to roar

'
;

khajju Skr. kharju 'itching'; gajjati miicchd Skr. murcha ' fainting.*
'
;

* pakinnako Skr. praklrnaka miscellaneous ' wool ramio Skr. varna colour.'
* ;

unno Skr. urna

Before dentals assimilation takes place, and the dental is sometimes altered to a cerebral. The MSS., however, differ
greatly in the use of dental and cerebral letters. * have kitti Skr. kirti ' fame ; kevatto Skr. kaivarta

We

'

fisherman

' ;

vattati

and
*

vattati Skr. y/\rt

addho and addho

*

Skr. ardha' half.'

sappo Skr.
'

glad
'

sarpa gabbho Skr.

' ;

a snake
*

*
;

tappati
'
; '

Skr.
'
;

Vtrp

to

be

kuca grass
*

garbha dhamrno Skr. dharma

'

womb

dabbho Skr. darbha

law

katnmam Skr.

karman

action

Nammadd

Skr.

Narmada Nerbudda.'
*

16

TALI GRAMMAR.
17) r-\-r=zbb: nibbdrtam Skr. nirvana (a technical term)

* gnbbo Skr. garva pride ' ' ubbt earth Skr. urvl.

pabbato Skr. parvata

'

mountain

'
;

In this combination both letters are preserved 18) r-\-h. with or without an inserted vowel: arahu Skr. arhant; tarahi
* garahati Skr. Vgarh to blame.* 19) If r follows gutturals, it is either assimilated or a "vowel is inserted, and both letters are preserved. In case of

tarhi Skr. tarhi

then

'

assimilation the guttural is optionally aspirated. cakkam Skr. cakra *a wheel*; akkodho Skr. akrodha 'mild-

be angry * gdhati Skr. to take Skr. to smell ghdyati aggo Skr. -v/ghrii -v/grah ' * first kkiddd Skr. kild Skr. krida ; kiriyd kriyd kriya ; agra
ness
;

kujjhati Skr.
*
;

-v/^rudh

to

'

play.'
'

followed by a palatal cpr. vajiro Skr. vajra * thunderbolt,' and paj'tro Skr. pajra firm.* 21) Dentals followed by r are either assimilated or preserved
the dental
r sometimes aspirates a preceding dental. Optionally, is changed to a cerebral. In many instances
:

20) For r

intact,
also,

we
*

find three forms

kutra, kuttha, kutta Skr. kutra

'

where
*

' ;

limb

'
;

sattu satthu Skr. 9atru

* *

enemy
* *

gattam Skr. gatra bhadro bhaddo Skr.

' ;

bhadra good Dd/nilo Skr. giddho Skr, grdhra greedy chuddho khuddho Dravida dravo davo Skr. drava liquid Skr. kshudra mean.'
;
'
;

22) After labials, r is assimilated: /)fl//Skr. prati (a prep.) ; * * pa Skr. pra (in compos.) ; pdno Skr. pnTna breath ; pii/o
* Skr. priya dear ; bhdmo Skr. * Skr. sa+prajna wise.*
*

bhrama whirling
'

* ;

sappamio

br

is

preserved in

Brahmd

Skr.

Brahman
:

bravlti Skr.

v/bru *to speak.* mr is assimilated in the beginning makkheti Skr. v/mrksh * * to anoint' ; miyyati miyati Skr. v/mr to die.'

For mr

in the middle of a word, cfr.

'
;

ambo Skr. amra

the

mango

tree

tambo Skr. tamra

copper.*
r,

23) v-\-r in the beginning of a word is assimilated to the middle of a word it always becomes bb.
vajati Skr. \/vraj
*

in

to

walk

'

hut pabbojati Skr.

pra+

v^vraj

SEMIVOWELS.
*

17

to

go forth';
*

vajo Skr. vraja *a

'
;

cow-pen*; subbato Skr.

'

suvrata

conscientious

tibbo Skr. tlvra

is

sharp.*

24) r, after sibilants, sdvako Skr. 9rdvako

*

assimilated

mother-in-law
to hear
*
' ;

' ;

pupil, follower * assu Skr. a9ru a tear

*

' ; *

sauu Skr. 9va9ru

;

sitnoti

Skr.

y/<}r\x
*

asso Skr. a9ra

8iri

corner*

assavo Skr. asrava

dis-

charge
*

but

25) For /i r, * shamelessness

*

Skr. 9ri fortune,' with svarabhakti. * ahirikd Skr. ahrl cp. hiri Skr. hrl shame'
;

rasso

Skr.

hrasva

'

short

'

rahado Skr.

hrada
26)

a pool.'

assimilated before gutturals and labials. * Skr. phaggu phalgu reddish.' ' ' * * appo Skr. alpa little kappo Skr. kalpa period of time ; * * ' jappo Skr. jalpa word, speech ; goppho Skr. gulpha ancle.*
/ is
;

27) Through metathesis gumbo Skr. simbali Skr. ctilmali * cotton-tree.*

28)

gulma
*

thicket

'

For /+ V
'

cp. kibbisam Skr. kilvisha

fault

*
; ' ;

billo,

but

also beluvo Skr. bilva

and bailava
;

the vilva-tree

khallato

Skr. khalvata

29)
*

/
;

' pallalam Skr. palvala small tank.' after gutturals shows svarabhakti in kileso Skr. kle9a

bald

'

sin

kilissati
*

Skr.
'
;

v/kli9
' ;

to

suffer

*
;

kilomakam Skr.
*

kloman
gildno

right lung Skr. glana ' faded

kilamati Skr. V^lara

to be tired

'

and from

this

an abstract
'

gelanmm is formed, see 9. akildsu Without svarabhakti kleso sin.' 30) For / after labials cp. pilavo Skr. plava a kind of duck piluvati and plavati Skr. spleen
' ' * * ;

Skr. aglasnu

healthy.*

'
;

pihakam Skr. pllhan

' *

; plavo Skr. plava * a raft.* ambilo Skr. amla 'sour*; milakkho Skr. mleccha 'stranger.* 31) After r, / is assimilated in dullabho Skr. durlabha.

y/^\\x

to float

32) For
'
'

after sibilants cp.

'

siloko Skr.

9loka
silittho
' ;

stanza

'
;

sileaumo semho Skr.

* *

9leshman
Skr.

phlegm
*

Skr.
asilesd

9lishta

adhering
'

sildgha

9lagha praise mansion.*

33)

Skr.

a9le8ha

name
Skr.

of

a lunar

For h + l

cp.

hilddati, hilddo,

hilito

^lilad 'to

be glad.* .2

18
34)
r,

PALI GRAMMAR.
in conjunction with gutturals in the middle of a assimilated thus pnkko Skr. pakva 'cooked.' In the
:

word

is

beginning of a word, kathito Skr. y^kvath

35) For V after palatals op. jaldti intensive daddallati Skr. jajvalyati.
*

'

boiled.*
blaze,'

to

and the

36) V after cerebral: kinnam Skr. kinva

'

yeast.'

37)
1)
*

t?

AFTER DENTALS.
tvam, tiivam, tarn Skr.
*

t-\-V'.
;

tvam 'thou';

tarati Skr.

In cattdro Skr. catvaras in ittaro Skr. and itvara four,' going,' we have assimilaIn caccaro Skr. catvara *a court' v was changed into tion. The gerundial suffixes p, which then palatalized the t.
v/tvar
taco Skr. tvac 'skin, bark.'

ivdna and tra are mostly preserved, but sometimes hdna is contracted into tuna. IriMjo Skr. rtvij 'an officiating
priest.'

2) d-\-v'. dlpo Skr. dvlpa 'an island'; doso Skr. dvesha For Skr. dvi, as 'hatred'; saddalo Skr. 9advala 'grassy.' the forms dve and duve occur ; in comnumeral, separate
position, however, dvi^ di, du and hd ' * twelve ; hdvlsati Skr. dvavim9ati.
:

bdrasa Skr. dvada9an

dh-\-v=dh: dhajo Skr. dhvaja 'flag'; dhamseti corresponds to Skr. -v/dhvams to fall, to perish,' and in composition ' uddhamseii dhani Skr. dhvani sound addhd Skr. adhvan
3)
*

'path.'
asso Skr.

38) V after sibilants is mostly assimilated : ' ' a9va horse ; bhassaro Skr. bhasvara

brilliant.'

In the beginning of a word 8V is sometimes preserved. We find also svarabhakti and assimilation, sdmi and suvdml Skr. svamin * lord.* sd Skr. 9 van dog,' has the following forms svannam and besides aono, suno, sdno, svdno and snvdno.
'
:

' saggo Skr. svarga Borpiam correspond to Skr. svarna gold.' ' the but are, sure Skr. heaven, paradise,* adjective soraggiko. ' ' 'health.* soithi and suratthi Skr. svasti 9vas yesterday ;

39) Through metathesis h-^v has become rh in jirhd Skr. ' savhayo Skr. sahvya called, named.* jihva tongue
' '
;

gahhharatn Skr. gahvara

'

cavern.'

40) Sibilants in conjunction with the surd letters. Following or preceding the surds, the sibilants are always

SIBILANTS.
assimilated
place.

19

mostly an aspiration of this combination takes

Skr. ksh becomes kkh and cch

some of the words exhibit

both forms.
riikkJio

Skr. shk and %\.=-kkh.

1) cakkhu Skr.

Skr. vrksha

cakshus 'eye'; Rakkhaso Skr. Eakshasa; tree hhikkhu Skr. bhikshu a mendi* ' ' ;

cant'; khalati Skr. v/skhal *to tumble'; khandho Skr. skandha ' * shoulder ; khattiyo Skr. kshatriya * member of the second
caste
* '
;

khayo Skr. kshaya

Skr.

'

decay
a girdle
*

khipati Skr,

Vkshlv
kukshi

to spit.*

2) kacchd
*
'

kaksha

'
;

kitcchi

Skr.

belly

chamd Skr. kshama

earth.'
'

3) akkhi acchi Skr. akshi

eye

ikko, accho,

and with a
'

* singular assimilation iso and isso Skr. rksha bear ; khuddo chuddho Skr. kshudra 'small'; chano khano Skr. kshana

moment,
a wing
' ; *

festive

time

'
;

pakkho paccho
*

Skr.
'

paksha
Skr.
nikko
;

khuro Skr. kshura

'
;

razor
'
;

' ;

cullo, culo, culo

'

kshuUa
Skr.
*

small
'

sakkato Skr. samskrta

Sanskrit

nishka

a golden ornament

nikkeso Skr. nishke^a

bald.'

* 9C=ecA: acchariyo Skr. accarya wonderful ';/)accAd ' ' ' Skr. paccat behind a scorpion ; vicchiko Skr. vr9cika

4) Skr.

'

nicchinati Skr.

5) t% hibhaccho Skr. bibhatsa

ni8+ Vci 'to ascertain.' and ps become alike cch.

*

loathsome
dicchati
*

* ;

cikicckati tikicchati

Skr.

cikitsati
;

to

cure

'
;

Skr.
'

ditsati

(desid.

to

Vda)

macchari Skr. matsarin

'

selfish.'
;

acchard Skr. apsaras

(desid. to v/labh).

nymph

lacchati

Skr.

lipsati

tth: ^(//Aa^i Skr. tishthati 'to stand'; yittho Skr. 6) 8htshth ishtk P.P.P. to Vyaj 'to sacrifice'; attha Skr. ash tan 'eight' ; ' * * chattho Skr. shashtha ' sixth ; hhattJio Skr. bhrashta fallen ;

mattho and matto Skr. mrshta

Skr. bhrshta' fried.'

'

'

polished

hhattho

and

hhatto

* a clod of earth,' is supposed to stand for Skr. 7) leddu loshta. The modem vernaculars, however, show the forms

lendu

and

leddu.

8) Skr. st

and sth are generally represented by

tth.

This

20

PALI GRAMMAR.
atthi Skr. asthi 'bone*; optionally be cerebralized. be'; hatthl Skr. hastin 'elephant/ and
*

may

atthi Skr. asti *to

without aspiration atto Skr. asta thrown.* 9) In the beginning of a word cp. thakanam Skr. sthagana ' * thamhho Skr. starabho thdnam Skr. sthana covering
; ;

'

standing,' and other derivatives from Vsthji with

;

cerebrali-

zation
*

thero
*
;

Skr.

sthavira
*

'

priest

a tope
'

thcvo

and chevo

drop,*
*

perhaps
sthiinu

chamhhati Skr. \/stambh stump of a tree.*

ihupo stQpa Skr. ^/stip, and ' to amaze ; khdnu Skr.

;

Skr.

to

10) In conjunction with the labials the sibilants are assimilated ; sometimes an aspiration takes place. The characters for /), ph being very much alike in Siamese, Burmese and

Sinhalese MSS.,
graphic.

it is

very

difficult to

say

if this is

more than

11) phasso Skr. spar^a 'touch'; phusati Skr. y/^VT9 '^ touch' ; puppliam Skr. pushpa 'flower'; by the side of pupphiio a form phitssito occurs, both going back to Skr. pushpita
'flowering.'
* 12) happo Skr. vashpa a tear ; apphotd Skr. asphota Skr. 'jasmine'; nippapo nishpapa 'free from sin'; nippaco * * * Skr. nishpava acwinnowing, clearing ; mpphddanam
'

complishment,* to nipajjati Skr.

*

nis+Vpad;

nij^phalo Skr.

nishphala
difierent

fruitless.'

41) Groups of nasals with sibilants following are treated in ways 1) The group is preserved intact ; 2) be:

and the nasal a vowel is inserted 3) the changed to A, and metathesis takes place. In the beginning of a word assimilation may take place. In several instances a word appears under more than one form.
tween the
sibilant is sibilant
;

1) sineho sneho Skr.

sneha
'

love

*
;

sindnam nahdnam

friendship ; nisneho ' ' Skr. sniina bathing

'

'

without
siniddho

niddho Skr. snigdha * oily ; snnhd smiim husd Skr. snushu ' ' Sumeru probably belong sister-in-law ; Sineru Neru

Mem

together,
'

and point to a form Sneru. 2) panhi Skr. pr9ni variegated

'
'

' ; *

pmiho Skr.
lust
' ;

question ; Skr. krshna

tajihd
'

tasind Skr.
'
;

trshna
'

pra9na kanho kasino

black

unho Skr. ushna

hot.'

SANDHI.
3) aitam mihitam Skr. smita
* *

21
' ;
'

smile

massu Skr. 9ma9ru

beard

'

agman

; gimho Skr. grishma summer ; asmd am/id Skr. 'stone'; semho silesumo Skr. gleshman 'phlegm'; rasmi ' * '

ramsimd Skr. ra9mimat ramsi Skr. ra9rai a ray of light * radiant apamdro apasmdro Skr. apasmara epilepsy.' 4) In the oblique case of the pronoun sm is optionally
; ' * ;

changed into mh, and thus

subst. anihi asmi amlie asme.

also in the

form of

the^ verb,

42) In combination with nasals, h shows svarabhakti or metathesis.

' hanute hnute Skr. hnute ganhati Skr. grhnati to grasp 'to conceal oneself' ; cihanam cinham Skr. cihnana 'mark,
;

'

sign

* jimho Skr. jihma crooked.' 43) Groups of three or more consonants are treated like
;

those consisting only of two. some instances svarabhakti.

Assimilation takes place, in

'

uddham uhhham Skr. urdhvam

sentation
is,
;

took place Skr. drshtva v'dr9; uddhumdyati (pass.) Skr. ud+\/<ihma 'to ' * be blown up tikkino tikklio tinho Skr. tikshna sharp
'
;

The repreupwards.' of course, due to the different assimilation which just as in disvd, and less frequently datt/iu, for
;

sanho Skr. 9lak8hna

'
'

moonlight

jiinhd dosino Skr. jyotsna ' * entire ; satti Skr. 9astri kasino Skr. krtsna
;

smooth

'

'knife'; idattat/am=.idam-\-frai/a; lacchati Skr. lapsyati fut. to ' * checchati fut. to chindati Skr. -v/chid to cut macco \/lahh
; ;

Skr. martya
strl
'

'

mortal

'
;

maccho Skr. matsya

'

'

fish

alio

Skr.

adra 'wet'; vatumam vattam Skr. vartman;

itthi itthi thl

Skr.

woman.'

44) Three consonants are only allowed in conjunction with the semivowels.

15.

SANDHI.1

In the preceding paragraphs the phonetic changes which take place in the midst of a word have been considered. It remains now to be seen what changes take place in the
>

Cpr.

On

Sandhi in Pall by the late R. C. Childen, Journal Royal Asiatic

Society, 1879.

22
sentence.

PALI GRAMMAR.

None

of the Sandhi rules

known from

Sanskrit

have of course grammar as imperative are so in Pali. external in as internal Sandhi to deal with Sandhi Pali, only
has been treated under the heading of phonetic changes, to

We

which it properly belongs. In prose the MSS. differ greatly in the use of Sandhi, and whilst, for instance, Burmese and Siamese MSS. prefer writing khvdham, the Singhalese MSS. separate the words into kho aham. In verse Sandhi of course takes place
according to the exigencies of the metre. Later texts, such as ""the Dipavamsa, take great liberties, omitting whole
syllables, etc.

The following tables will that occur

:

show the most frequent changes

VOWEL

SANDHI.

VOWELS IN COMBINATION VHTH VOWELS.

a+a=:id'. ndhosi=na ahosi.

a+a+coNjUNCT coNSONANT=a
:

na 'tthi=na atthi; pana

annam=:pan' annam. ndssa=na assa. flf4-fl+ CONJUNCT CONSONANT =d a before a is rarely elided. Such elision generally takes
place before

aham

1/ ai/am

this,'

and the forms of the

dai.

verb atthi

to be.*
;

d-\-h=d: taddyam=tadd ayam

d+^
a

iaddsi=tadd

d-{-i=:e: bandhuss 'eva=.bandhussa ica.

= + iti=. d
+ M=u

nopetizn na upeti.
:

Tissdti vacancna
:

= Tissa Hi.
;

a-\-piz=.

dpi
:

ajjdpi

= ajja.
ubhayam
tadup(f

cubhayam-=.ca

tadd upa-

sammanti.

a-{-i=d (elision of i): yena *me=yena ime. This elision seems only to take place in case of the pronoun idam. a+t or M= or w (elision of a) pahdy* imam=pahdya imam ; tatr' idam-=tat)'a idam; yass* indriydnznyassa indriydnii; ten*
:

upa8ankami= fena upasahkami.

VOWEL 8ANDHI.
a
is

23
;

elided before d u e o: yen* di/asmd

uithdi/*

dsand
\

idh*

dcuso; eken* uno-=.ekena tass' okdsam.

um\

netv'

ekamantikam

o*

etarahi

d sometimes elides a short vowel, and less often a long vowel other than d disvd 'panissayam for diavd upan ; sided
:

*va for sutvd eva.

is

often elided before a long vowel or a short followed

:

by a conjunct consonant eva=neti'd ek.

tath' eva=.tathd\ netv*

ekamantikam

d-|-i=e in seyyathldam=.seyyathd idam and saddhidhdzs, saddhd idhd.

elided before short or long vowels gacchdm* aham a dasah' gacchdmi p' ajja=-pi ajja upagatam-=dasahi upa. i is elided in timh' a^sa=.tmihi assa.
%

is

+t=l:
i-\-a=.a
i

in combinations with
:

iti:

samanUdha=.8amantiidha.

kihcdp)i=.kinci api
t

preceded by
;

or

tt

(more frequently kiticid apt). and followed by a vowel becomes fy:

jlcanty elaka

ayam ti ayam. The examples are from late Pali works, and are perhaps doubtful.
ty
itl-\-ecam: ity evam, but also according to the rules after

which
etc., as

iy

palatalized ice evam,

and thus di=jj

api=app,

is

14, and ifv evam. pointed out above, elided before a vowel: samef dyasmd=sametu
\

d;

sadh*

dvuso=-sadhu

tusites' upapajjat/iaz=tusitesu

upa.
are

u-\-i=.u~^ sadhuti=.sadhu iti; kitnsudha=-kimsu-\-idha. The examples 5efore a vowel changes into v.

doubtful
e

vatthv* eva-=vatthu eva.

may

be elided before a long vowel: w' d8i=me dsi; stlavant*

te

ettha-=.sllavanto ettha.
e

sometimes elides a following vowel:

:

'me=^te ime; sace

'jja=ajj'a.

e+a=.d

sacdham

= sace + ahaip

e-\ra=jyi the a being lengthened: tydham=.te aham. After louWe consonant lengthening takes place arbitrarily.

often elides a following vowel: so '/iam=.so

aham

pattiko

*vaz=eva; kattahbo' posathe=.k upo. is elided before a vowel kuV eUha=kufo ettha
:

katam'

assa^^katamo

assa.

24

PALI GRAMMAR.
ayam.

o+a=d: duJikhAyamdukkho
o+a=r,

the a being lengthened: 8vdham=-80 afiam; khvd' After a double consonant lengthening takes aham. ham=.kho
place arbitrarily. becomes v before a long vowel.

16.

EUPHONIC CHANGES.
its
:

word ending in d, is followed by idam, or one of oblique cases, y is inserted na yklam, na-y-iinassa.
1)

If a

words ending in vowels or nasal vowels 2) becomes viya sometimes e.g. kim v'uja like what. u. 3) V is inserted if a vowel is followed by u or in vowels or nasal words after becomes eva yeva ending 4)
iva

after

vowels.
6)

is

inserted between two vowels

idha-m dhu:=idha

dhu; jeyya-m attdnam=jeyya atf\ idha-m-ijjhati, giri-m-iva. in a vowel is followed 6) r is inserted when a word ending and vijjur eva. dhiratthu vowel: with a by a word commencing satthud anvayo. 7) d\a inserted in sammad eva, anvad eva,

These consonants have been inserted according

to false analogy. few instances occur of the original consonant reappear8) which, according to the phonetic rules in Pali ing

should be omitted.
manasdd atmavimxittdnam-=mana8d
in Sanskrit)
;

\ yasmdd apeti (and so tasmdd eva=ta8md; kenacid eva; ahud eva (Skr.

puthag eva (Skr. prthag eva) ; pageva (Skr. tunhltn dslnam (Skr. tushnim) ; vuttir esd (Skr. prageva) ; eva (Skr. sadbhir eva) ; pathavi dhdtur sahhhir vrttir esha)
; ;

abhud eva)

eva=dhdtu
punar eva)

eva (Skr. dhiitur eva)

;

punar eva=puna

eva (Skr.
;

hhattur atthe=hhattu atthe (Skr. bhartur arthe)

chal eva (Skr. shad eva). final 9) The niooahTta stands sometimes for an original

consonant.

before vowels

This can be replaced by an original consonant sakim stands for Skr. sakrt, and before eva it
:

becomes aakid

eva, in
is

accordance with Sanskrit.

10) The same

the case with tarn

yam

etam, which stand

DECLENSION.
for tad

26
this

yad etad respectively, and appear in

:

shape before

vowels
11)

tad eva

etad avoca.

to false analogy, wrong consonants sometimes the side of the right punam eva for punar, artnad appear by atthu for annam, hahud eva for hahur.

Owing

12) Original double consonants which are assimilated are

sometimes after vowels doubled.

13) In verse the niggahTta
no
ce
is

elided before a consonant

;

maccdna jlvitam muhceyya candimam for munceyyam etam huddhdna sdsanam for buddhdnam sds. for maccdnam 14) Sometimes the nasal vowel 4*ntirely elided im* etam z=.imam etamy^mp ajf aha m =. nipajjim aham, am-\-a=a: ekam iddham samayam; ekam idam aham;
; :

evdyam=evam ayam.
it

may be changed

15) If a word ends in niggahTta and a consonant follows, to the nasal of that class to which the con-

sonant belongs: tn-\-k-=nk, m-\-c:=nc, m=^tz=nt, m-\-t=-nt,

m-\-p'=^mp.
16)

word ending in the niggahTta, followed by a word

y,

beginning with kannam.

17)

becomes nn

tarn yeva=.tanneva

dnantari-

The niggahTta

before h optionally becomes n

evanhi.

17.

DECLENSION.

1)

We

have drawn attention in the chapter on Phonetics

to the fact that Pali only allows vowels and nasalized vowels at the end of a word. Through this law the shape of a word

considerably altered. Roughly speaking, vowels are either substituted at the end of a word, or those consonants which
is

would impede the action of

this law are dropped. consequence of this process is, that, although the essential features of the various Sanskrit declensions are preserved,

no declension has kept within its proper range. 2) The nominative case as a prototype case has influenced the other cases, and since stems e.g. ending in as or a alike

26

PALI GRAMMAR.
the as and a declension follow

form the nominative case in

o,

respectively the analogy of the as or o declension. 3) Besides this the influence of the declension of the

pronouns on the declension of nouns has to be noticed, and vice vend.

Pali distinguishes three genders masculine, feminine and neuter, two numbers singular and plural, and, including the vocative, eight cases. In the declension of neuter nouns and of pronouns some traces of an old dual are to be found, which will be noticed hereafter but practically speaking
4)
:

the dual

is

extinct.

5) The Piili grammarians recognize six case relations, which by their name indicate the functions of the cases. The nominative and vocative cases are of course omitted in

this enumeration.

6)

The nominative

case

is

simply called the

first

case

(pathamd). It simply expresses the subject. It is sometimes used instead of the vocative, which latter is called the
*

alapanam
7)

the addressing case.*

The names given

show

respectively to their relation {karakam) are :

the other cases to

kammam
karanam

accusative.

instrumental.
dative.
ablative.

sampaddnam apdddnam
sdmi
okdso or ddhdro

genitive.
locative.

Other terms are

nissakko,

for the accusative upai/ogo, for the ablative

and

for the locative

hhummo.

USES OF THE CASES.

I)

The relation of the Accusative (kammam).

is

The

accusative
transitive

verb.

used as the case of the direct object of a The transitive verba have a somewhat

wider range in all the Indian languages than in the related ones, and so we find an accusative as the goal of motion

USES OF THE CASES.

* bringing,* sending/ etc. * gantid having gone to the monastery/ Verbs of peaking may follow the same rule.

27
Vihdram
Tarn rdjd

with verbs of

going/

idam abruii

the king is further used to denote space traversed ' and duration of time. Patindsa yajandni gacchati he marches

'

said this to him.*

The

accusative

fifty yojanas.*

used with verbs signifying to have recourse, to appear, Buddham saranam gacchdmi ' I take my refuge in the Buddha.* Causative verbs have a double accusative. Updsakam mam
It
is

to ask.

hhavam Gotamo dhdretu

a
disciple.*

'let

the lord Gotama receive

me
:

as

accusative is used with the following prepositions * Sangamam pati pihd longing for union.* pati * rukkham pari in the direction of the tree.* pari :
:

The

anu

arm

Sdriputtam pannavd

hhikkhu

a priest
into

inferior to S. in learning.* anto,antara: antara vUhim olokayamdno 'looking the street.'

down

abhi abhito: abhito

tiro
:

II)

The

gdmam 'round the village.' bhdvam gacchati he goes out of sight.* relation of the Instrumental (karanam).
tiro
*

We

adjacency, accompaniment, All the uses instrumentality. of this case may be derived from its original meaning. notice particularly the use made of the instrumental
association,

The

instrumental

denotes

and of

course,

to denote 1) equality, likeness, accordance, default * Rdgena samo aggi ndma natthi there is no fire like lust/
:

akkhind kdno

blind of one eye.*

:
'

2) the space traversed and duration of time

nabhasd gacchati he goes through air.' 3) the construction of a passive verb or participle

was heard by me.' 4) the prepositions aaha saddhim vind, though generally used with the instrumental, are also found with other cases Saha gabbhena jiiitakkhayam pdpunissdmi I shall perish
thus
it
:

evam me

mtam

'

'

together with

my

unborn child

* ;

Mahatd

bhikkhu'Sahg/ieiia

28
saddhim
*
*

PALI GRAMMAR.
with a great company of priests
fault.*
' ;

vind

dosena

without any
Ill)

The relation of the Dative (sampaddnam)

[effect-

ing case]. The case of the indirect object. It is used to denote objects * to, towards, for, at, against,' which, anything
is

done or intended.
It is used, therefore, with words signifying Maggam dehi rahno 1) give, share out, and assign
:

'

make
* ;

room
2)

for the king.'

Show, announce, declare

*

tasaa abruvi

'

said to

him

I will explain thee.* 3) Give attention, have a regard or feeling, inclination, ' obeisance Bhavato bhaddam hotu may good happen to the
:

tut/ham avikaromi

lord.*

4) In an infinitive sense the world.'

'
:

lokdnukampdya

out of pity to

lY) The ablative relation (apdddnam).

case.

The 'from'

used to denote removal, distinction, separation, issue, deprival, restraint: mdtito sudd/io '.pure on the mother's ' side avijfd paccayd sahkhdrd.
It
is
;

special applications, we notice 1) the ablative after words expressing fear in interchange with the genitive : Sahbe bhdyanti maccuno or maccund ' all fear death.'

As

vd natthi 'than

2) the ablative of distinction: yato panitataro id vaaitthataro whom there is none better or more acin

Also complished.' instrumental.

interchange with the genitive and

is used with the prepositions and adverbs the notion of distance, removal, such as dra * far implying

The

ablative

off';

purd
:

formerly,'

formation

drd
;

so

which are ablatives according to their dsavakkhayd he is far from the extinction
*
*

his arriving.* The case relation is [sdmi]. an adjectival one, out of which all other uses arise. It is to a great extent interchangeable with IV) the

of passion*

t<u%a

dgamand purd before

V) The genitive relation

locative [okd8o]y the

in' case.

Thus we

find a locative

and genitive absolutely employed

DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
rudato ddrakassa or rudantasmim darake
'
;

29
'

whilst the child

was crying having In connection with verbs and substantives denoting either
vutfe

Evam

'

said thus.'

possession or dominion, either the genitive or locative is used. The locative is used interchangeably with the accusative,

instrumental, dative, and ablative. Among prepositional uses of the locative

we

notice upa

and

adhi having respectively the sense of inferior and superior to. ' ' Upa khdriyam dono a drona is inferior to a kharl ; adhi
devesu

Buddho

Buddha

is

superior to the gods.*

locative is used
,

In interchange with the instrumental, the

with adjectives of the sense of
I.

satisfied, eager, zealous.

DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
give the paradigms for the which we make two divisions.
different

"We
I.

shall

now

declensions, of

II.

Stems in vowels. Stems in consonants.

We shall mark those forms which belong to the pronominal declension with f, those which are taken from another declension with *, obsolete forms with
:{:.

STEMS IN YOWELS.
Masculine and Neuters in
a.

Dhamma.
SINGULAR.

PLURAL.

Nom. dhammo Voc. dhamma dhammd Ace. dhammam

Instr.

dhamma dhamma dhamme

J dhammase

dhammena
dhamtndya

vinaycL

dhammehhi dhammehi

Dat.
Abl.

dhammassa

dhammdnam
dhamynebhi dhammehi

dhammd fdhammasmd t dhammamhd

dhammassa

Gen.
Loc.

dhammdnam
dhammcsu

dhamme f dhammasmhn fdhammamhi

\
30

STEMS IN VOWELS.
SIN'OVLAB.

31

Ahl.

oggind faggimhd f aggismd

aggino
*

aggibhi

agglhi

Gen.
Loc.

aggissa
'

agglnam
agglsu

aggini faggimhi faggismim

isi
*

voc. sing, of to Sanskrit rshe.

The

a sage

occurs as

uy

corresponding

From muni
Of
occur
ado,

*a recluse' the
'

loc. sing,

occurs as mune.

ddi
:

'

starting-point

the following locative sing, forms

ddu corresponding both to Skr. adau, * ddim f ddiinhi

in
*

f ddismim.

The neuters
paradigm
aithi

follow the declension of those in

'

in.

As

a bone

will be given.

32
SINGULAR.

PALI GRAMMAR.
PLIRAL.

Dat.

nadiyd

nadyd

najja

nadlnam
nadlhhi

Abl.

nadihi

Gen.
Loc.
nadiyani
loc. sing,
*

nadlnam
nadiyd
of

najjam
is

nadlsu

The

Bdmmsl

given as Bdrdnasim.
strl,

itthi, thl

woman/
:

corresponding to Skr.

shows the

following forms

SINGULAR.

PLURAL.
thl
thl

Nom.
Voc.
Ace.
Instr.

itthi

itthlyo itthlyo
itthi

thiyo
thiyo

* itthi

itihl

* itthi

itthim
itthiyd

itthiyam

*
itthlyo
itthlhi

thiyam
thiyam thiyam

itthlbhi

Dat.
Abl.

itthiyd
itthiyd

itthinam
itthlbhi

thlnam
itthlhi

Gen.
Loc.

itthiyd

thiyam
itthiyd

itthinam
itthlsu
u.

thlnam
thlsu

itthiyam

Declension in
Bhikkhu.
SINGULAR.

Nom.
Yoc.
Ace.
Instr.

bhikkhu

bhikkhavo
bhikkhavo
*

bhikkhu

bhikkhu

bhikkhave
* bhikkhavo

bhikkhu

bhikkhiim

bhikkhu
bhikkhuhi
* bhikkhussa

bhikkhund
* bhikkhuno

bhikkhubhi

Dat. Abl.

bhikkhunam
bhikkhubhi

bhikkhuno

t bhikkhusmd

bhikkhuhi

Gen.
Loc.

t bhikkhumhd bhikkhuno * bhikkhussa t bhikkhusmim f bhikkhumhi

bhikkhunam
bhikkhusu
bhikkhusu

We have in adverbial
hetu.

use the gen. sing, heto and hetu from

The
nom,

influence of other declensions

:

we

find in such forms as

plur. oi jantu and hetu jantuyo jantuno, hctuyo hetuno. Masculines in u agree with those in m, showing the long u

in the nom. voc. ace. plur. In those forms formations according to other declensions, e.g.

we have
:

also

sabbatmu
abhibhu
:

sabbammno
abhibhuvo

abhibhuno

STEMS IN CONSONANTS.

33

Neuters in u form their nom. ace. plur. either in u or uni. The form of the aco. sing, in m is also used for the nominative.

Feminines in
Jamhu.
8INOULAB.

&.

34
SINGULAR.

TALI GRAMMAR.
PLURAL.

Acc.

aatthdram

satthare

*8atthd.ro

* Instr. aatthard * satthund aatthdrd satthdrebhi satthdrehi * satthmsa satthanam * satthdnam Dat. safthtt * *

satthuno

mtthdrdnam

Abl.

sat (hard

mtthdrd
satthiissa

sattharehhi * satthdrebhi

Gen.
Loc.

satthu

aatthatiam * satthdrdnam * satthdnam

sattharesu

satthari

*satthdresu

With
Nom.
Voc. Acc.
Dat.

the declension of satthd, that of pita nearly agrees.

PLURAL.

SINGULAR.

pita
pitd
pita

pitaro

pitaro
*
pitare

pitaram
*pitund
pitu *pitu8sa *pituno

pitaro
*pituhi
pitarehhi

Instr. pitard

pituhhi

pitunnam
pituhhi

pitHnam
*pituhi

pitdnam
*pitarehhi

*pitardnam
Abl.
*pitareh,i

pitunnam pitunam *pitardnam

pitusu
*pitusu

pitdnam
*pitare8u

STEMS IN CONSONANTS.

35

The word corresponds to the Skr. sakhi, which shows an The same irregularities we find also in irregular declension. Piili, and besides this we find the influence of other deThe forms are not marked. clensions.
SCrOULAK.

Nom.
Voc.
Ace.
Instr.

sakhd
sakhe
sakhi
sakhl

sakhd

sakha

sakhdram
sakhind
sakhissa

sakhdyam
sakhino

sakhdnam

sakham

Dat.

Abl.

sakhind
sakhissa

Gen.
Loc.

sakhino

sakhe

Nom.
Voc.

sakhdyo sakhdyo
sakhl

sakhino sakhino

sakhdno

sakhdno
sakhdyo
sakhehi

Ace.
Instr.

sakhino

sakhdno

sakharehi

sakhdrehhi

Dat. Abl.

sakhinam
sakharehi

sakhdrdnam
sakhdrehhi
sakhehi

Gen.
Loc.

sakhardnflm
sakkhdresu

sakhdrdnam
sakkhesu

sakhinam

II.

Stems in Nasals.

36

PALI GRAMMAR.
tltumd
is of comparatively rare occurrence. Ace. sing, dtumdnam

The form
find
:

We

Nom.

ace. plur.

Gen. and

dat. plur.

dtum&no dtumdnam.

Brahman.

STEMS IN CONSONANTS.

37

38

PALI GRAMMAR.
traces of its belonging to this

word has only preserved a few

class.

we

Besides the regular forms of the a declension of kammam, find the instr. sing, kammund kammand, the gen. sing.

kammuno, and the loc. kammani. In several instances forms of the an declension are in
adverbial use only.

2)

Declension of Stems in mant

UASC.

vanf.

SmOULAR

SmOULAB

NBTTT.

Nom. gnnavd
Voc.
Ace.
Instr.

gunavam gunavam *gimard *gunava * gunavantam gunavam gunavam

*gunavanto
gunavatd
*
*

gwiavantena
gunavantassa gunavassa gunavassa

Dat.

gunavato

Abl.

gunavatd
gunavato
gunavati
*

Gen.
Loc.

gunavantassa

*gunavante

f gunavantasfnim -fgumvantamhi

Nom.

Y
Ace.
Instr.

gunavanto *gunavantd
* *

gunavanti

gunavantam
gunavantdni

*gu7iavante

gunavanti

gunavantehhi

gunavantehi

Dat. Abl.

gunavatam
*

gmiavantdnam gunavantdnam

gunavantehhi
*

Gen.
Loc.

gmiavatam
gunavantesu

The corresponding feminine is made by adding t to either the strong or weak form gunavanti or gunavati. It is then declined like a form l.
:

The

like those in mant, participles in ant are declined

is

with

the exception of the nom. sing, case, which *gacchanto. Compare further
:

gaccham or

Nom.

sing,

arahd and araham

'

venerable.*
*

mahd

mahaw

mahanto

'

great*

STEMS IN CONSONANTS.
San/o P.P. to
atf/ii
'

39

to be.'

shows the following forms

40
optionally in verses;

PALI GRAMMAR.
the forms with long vowels are the

more frequent.
Notice nom. plur.
d'lpiyo,

from dipl *a panther.'

The word
asthi,

atthi a bone/ corresponding shows the following forms

:

'

to Skr. asthan

and

43

PALI GRAMMAR.

II.

DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS.
1)

Personal Pronouns.

DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS.

43

44

PALI ORAMMAB.

DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS.
3)

45

Relative Pronoun.

46

PA

NUMERALS.
'higher'; adharo 'inferior'; uhhayo 'both*; dakkhino 'right*; piibbo 'former';
*

47
aparo paro
visso

'other';

'all*;

and sabbo all, every.' Some few of these words form to the nominal declension.

their cases also according

20.
Cakdinals.

NUMERALS.

eko

ekd
duve
tisso

ekam
ubho (for
tint
all

2 3 4
6

dve
tayo

3 genders)
cattdri

cattdro {caturo)

catasso

panca
cha {chat)
satta

7 8 9
10
11

attha

nava

dam
ekarasa

ekddasa

12 13 14

bdrasa
tedasa

dvddasa
terasa
telasa

catvddasa

cuddasa

coddasa

15 16 17 18 19

pancadasa
solasa

pannarasa
satlarasa

pannarasa

sorasa

sattadasa

atthddasa
ckunavlsati

atthdrasa

ekunavisam

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

risad

visam

ekatlsati

ekavUam
bdvisafi

dvdvlsati

tevlmti
catuvisati

pancavUati
chabblsati
sattablaati

sattavisati

atthavlsam

48

PALI GRAMMAR.
Cardinal*.

29 30 31 32 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200
1,000

ehunatimmm
timaa
timsati

ehunatimsati

ekatimsa

dvattimm
catfdlisam

cattdrlsam

tdlisam

talisa

pannasa
safthi
sattati
aslti

pannasam

pannasa

navuti
sfl^;,

bdmtam
sahassam

dvdsatam
nahiitam

10,000

dasasnhassam
satasahassam

100,000
1,000,000

lakkham

dasamfasahassam
Icoti

100,000,000

From

koti

upwards

eacli

times the preceding one.

succeeding numeral is ten million After the combination with koti,

pakoti kotippakoti and nahutam ninna/nitam akkhohini and The last bindu, the succeeding numerals are neuters in am.

numeral given is asankhej/f/am=10,000,000^^. In combination with una 'deficient, less,' the eka is in some instances omitted, as unasattamtam 699.' addhiko 'exceeding, surpassing,' is used sometimes to
*

saftddhikavlsa '27,' denote the higher number, e.g. 7 exceeding 20 atthdramdhikam dvisatam *218.'
: ;

i.e.

The following forms

26 44 66 84
Fractionals are
addfio
:

of numerals ought to be noticed.

paTicavisati

pannavlsati cuitdllsam

cattallsam

chappannasa
ctd/dsiti

caturdsVi

addhatiyo

nddho *J*; ditjaddho diraddho, * 2^ addhuddho 3^.'

'
;

*1J';

addhateyyo

NUMERALS.
Other combinations with addho are frequent, 500 addhatelasasata * 1250.'
' ' ; '

49
e.g.

dasaddha'

sata

catutthamso

\.'

For the other

fractionals the ordinals are used.

To form the
*

once,' solasakkhattum

multiplicatives khattum 16 times.'

*

is

used

ckakkhattum

To form adverbs from numerals the

used
:

suffixes

dhd and sa are

ekadha

in one

'

way

ekasa 'one

by

one.*

Adjectives are formed with the suffixes tvV/AOj^fwno and ahgiko: ' ' ' * atthavidho eightfold ; navaviddho ninefold ; sattagum
*

sevenfold

' ;

'

'

* ;

atthangiko

eightfold

pancahgiko

fivefold.*

Declension of the Cardinals.

eka.

60

m
THE ORDINALS.
51

THE ORDINALS.
The
ordinals are formed from the cardinals

by means of

suffixes.

are declined like adjectives. The fem. ends, with exception of the first four numerals which form their stems in a difierent way, in I, the neuter in am.

They

For the ordinal of one, pathamo, pathamd, pathamam is used. From dva and ti we have dutiyo fem. dutiyd^ neut. dutiyam
;

tatiyo fem. tatiyd, neut. tatiyam

cardinals for *4,' '5,' * 6,' '7' form the ordinals adding iha catuttho, pancafho, chattho, sattho. For * 4 ' a form turlyo with the fem. turiyd occurs.
:

The

by

Besides the form in tha the suffix

' *
*

ma

is

added to form the

*99,*

ordinals,

5,'

6,'
'

7,'
',

and onwards up to
so/asawo
* *

e.g.pancamo

*5th'; dasamo

10i\i'

ekarlsatimo *2l8t';

timsatimo

16th'; ekunavlsatimo '\Qi\x''y * 30th ; satthimo *60th.*

ordinal
'

Besides these longer forms from 10 upwards, made from the cardinal by the suffix a
:

we
'

find

an

15th pancadaso 23rd ; ekunatimso

'

'
; '

vlso
'
;

'

20th

' ; *

ekavlso

'

2l8t

ievlso

29th
*

thmo
*
;

30th
*

'
;

cattdhso
'
;

'

40th
80th

*
;
'

pamiaw 50th
navido
*

'

'

sattho

60th

sattato

70th

aslto

'

90th.'
is

The

ordinal for 100

satamo,

suffix sataiamo, just as for

and with the fuller superlative 1000 sahassamo and sahassatamo.

ordinals
is

The fem. of some of the

:

used to designate the

day of the month, e.g. * paTicaml the fifth day of the half month.*
ekddasi
*

pa/icadasl

the eleventh day of the half month.* * the fifteenth day of the half month.*

21.

THE VERB.

The native grammarians divide the verbs according to the manner in which the present and the tenses and modes which belong to the present system, viz. imperfect, potential and
These are called imperative, are formed into seven classes. from the verb which serves as prototype for the whole class :

62
*

PALI GRAMMAR.
1) hhavddiy
i.e.

hhu and the other verbs/ or

having hhu

at the beginning.' 2) rudhddi.

3) diiadi.
4) svcidL 5) kiyadi. 6) tanadi. 7) curaiddi.

First class
1)

It consists of the following divisions

i

The

^bhu
2)

root ending in bhava.

root
'

or

ti

is

gunated, and a added

ending in a consonant an a is added, ^9- ^/pac-\-a-=.paca 'to cook*; further, y/tiid *to gnaw'; y/nud to remove yjlikh to write \/phus to touch.'
* ' '

To the

'

3) To the root ending in a vowel, the personal endings are added without intervening vowel, e.g. \Jyd to go.* The second class comprises those verbs in which a nasal
*

is

inserted before

the final consonant of the root.

*

The
first

terminations are added with an intermediate a as in the

class
:

y/riidh,

rundhati

to restrain.*

class adds ya to the root. The phonetic rules * regarding y are applied y/div^ dibbati to play.' The fourth class adds nu nd una to the root stmoti
: :

The third

pdpundti.

The
kindti
*

fifth class adds

to
'

tid to
*

the root which ends in a vowel

buy

dhundti

to shake.'

The

sixth class adds o or m to the root.

:

The

root

generally ends in a nasal tanoti, karoti. The seventh class adds aya eiio the gunated root: corayati Every verb is supposed to have two voices with separate

endings

the parasaapadam or transitive, and attanopadam or

intransitive.

The attanopadam

is

very restricted in

its use,

and

it

is

therefore difficult to

give the attanopadarn for

every verb.

The
root

and

passive verbs are formed through adding ya to the affixing the ending of the attanopadam, or though

less frequently of the

parassapadam to this base.

:

The

tenses of the Pali verb are

m^mmm

THE VERB.
Special tense
1) Present {vattdmdnd),

53

Optative

(sattami)

and derived from it two modes: and Imperative {pancamt)

;

the Participle Present aa verbal adjective.

2) Imperfect {htyattanl).

General tenses
1) Perfect (jparohkhd).

2)

Aorid

{ajjatanl).

3) Future (bhavtssantl). 4) Conditional (kdldtipatti)

The general
tenses,

tenses often

take the basis of the special

A verb
changing
*

and vice versd. can appear in

its

different classes without, however,

e.g.

meaning,
*

titthati
' ;

and

thdti

to stand

' ;

daddti, deti
vajjeti

and

dajjati

to give

vadati, vadeti, vajjati

and

to speak.'
' *

Other roots appear in different classes with a differentiation ' of meaning, such as, e.g. '^/vid, vidati to know ; vindati to * and vijjati to be, to exist.' find, to get 1) It is needless to advert to the fact that the classes have
:

'

been made up to a great extent to bring the conjugation of Pali in a closer connection with that of Sanskrit.
2) The tenses of the Aorist and Imperfect are simply tenses of the past, and it is therefore not advisable to take

the Imperfect separately from the Aorist. It is quite true that originally there existed a difference in the meaning between Aorist and Imperfect ; but in the Pali texts, as they
lie

before us, no such difference can be traced.

"We

shall

therefore consider the Imperfect simply as a tense of the past

not dependent on the Present system. 3) The Perfect tense is of rare occurrence.
I.

The Present System.

64

PALI GRAMMAR.
IMPERATITB ATTANOPADAM.
1) e 1)

niPBRATlTE rAEASSAPADAM.

1)

mi
hi
iu

1)

ma

dmase

2)
3)

2) tha 3) anfu

2) asu
3)
<a;w

2) vho

OPTATIVE PAUA8SAPADAM.

3) antam OPTATIVE ATTANOPADAM. 1)

1) e

eyydmi

1)

eyydma

2) e eyydsi
3) c cyyrt

2) eyydtha
3)

eyywn

1) eyyam 2) e^Ao 3) e^Aa

eyydmhe

2) eyyavho 3) erawj
:

"We best divide the verbs

1)

into the following classes

Verbs which

affix

the endings given above without

intervening rowel.
2) Reduplicating class.
3)

Nasal

class.

4) a- class. 5) ya- class.

I.

The Root Class

of Sanskrit

grammar.

Through the

contraction of aya into e, of ava into o, many verbs follow now the analogy of this class. These are either primitive verbs such as j'eti for j'ayati, or derivatives such dpddeti for

Most of the verbs have forms in other classes. dpddayati. distinction between strong and weak forms takes place

only occasionally.

We give as paradigms
\/i

Sing, emi
esi
eti

Plu. ema
etha
enti,
*

Sing,

ydmi
yd^i

^Jya Plu.

ydma
ydtha
yanti

yanti

ydti

Like emi, semi

dani occurs as

to lie down.'

The

third person attanopa-

Sing, sete
* *
;

Plur. sente
are, vdti
'

Verbs following the analogy of ydti

to protect

to

blow

'

pdti Besides the forms, according to the reduplicating class, ' and thd * to stand/ we have deti fhati, o( y/dd 'to give which follow the analogy of ydti.

bhdti

'

to shine.'

In the same way a contracted form of verbs in

follows this class,
e.g.
:

aya, ava

PRESENT TENSE.
koti,

66
*

a contracted form of
:

b/tavati,

\/bhu

to exist,'

which

shows the following forms

Sing, homi
host

Plur. homa
hotha
honti

hoti

y/bru 'to speak' exhibits besides the form braviiif a contracted form bruti.

Sing, brumi

Plur. brUma

bmsi
bruti

brutha
bravanti

The ATTANOPADAM

is

Sing, brave JrMse

JrS^e

Plur. br&mhe
br-Avhe

bravante

The most important verb

Sing, asmi
asi

of this division

is ^/as

to be.*

amhi
ahi

Plur. asma
attha
santi

amha

atthi

Single forms following the

III. p. sing, vatti

first class are, e.g.

V vac

to

speak,' at the side of vacati

and

vadati.
'

III. p. sing, hantiy yjhan, III. p. pi. duhanfi, y/duh

to strike.'
'

to milk.*

III. p. pi. lihanti, y/lih *to lick.* * III. p. sing. att. hanute, y/hnu to conceal oneself.*
II.

Reduplicating Class.

to the root.

The present form is formed by prefixing a reduplication The rules of reduplication are The consonant of the reduplicating syllable is always 1)
:

the

first

consonant of the root.

non-aspirate
is

2)

substituted in reduplication for an

aspirate.

3)
*

A palatal is substituted for a guttural or

//.^

The

reduplication syllabic

substitution of the palatals for the gutturals shows that the vowel of the was uiuformly an #, as in Greek.

66
4)

PALI GRAMMAR.

A long vowel is
*

shortened in the reduplicated syllable.

;

Examples of reduplication are

dadiifi,

yjda to give.* * dadhdti, dahdti y/dhd to put.'

*

titthdU, y/thd
*

to stand.'

jahdii, ^/hd
*

to leave.'

jiihoti,

The

y/hu to sacrifice.* * or pibati, pivati ^pd to drink/ cpr. Lat. hihere. conjugation is as follows :
y/dd

Sing, dadami daddsi

daddti

Plur.

damma
dattha

dadanti
plu. a

In analogy with the first pers. created, viz. dammi, dasi, dati. Besides these forms we have
:

new

singular

was

This formation is ya class. according probably due to the optative. The form deti was noticed
dajjati

to

the

above.

Of the attanopadam only a few forms can be

I. sing,

quoted, viz.

dade and

I.

plur. daddmase.

y/thd Sing, titthdmi

titthasi
titthati

Plur. titthdma

tkdtha
titthanti
:

titthatha

III.

The Nasal

Class

In

it

we comprise

the verbs of the

fourth, fifth

grammarians. stem in form their the fourth and present by adding They sixth class no if the root ends in a vowel, o if in n, or as in
the case of karoti in
r.

and sixth

classes of the native

These verbs add arbitrarily also nd,

the class-sign of the fifth class. The few verbs belonging to that class always retain the class-sign na.

As paradigms may
Sing, aiinomi,
suTiosi,

serve
y/su

'

to hear.'

sundmi
sunasi
smiati

Plur.
sundst

mnoma,
aunotha,
siinanti

simdma
sunatha

sunoti,

PRESENT TENSE.
In the same way y/tan 'to
the attanopadam occurs as
:

67
which

stretcli' is conjugated, of

Sing, tanve

Plur. tanumhe

tanme
tanute
'

tanuvhe
tanvante
in a kindmi.
to this class is

y/ht

to

buy has only the forms

'

The most important verb belonging

*

^kar

to make.'

Sing, karomi karosi

karoti

kummi

Plur. karoma

karotha
karonti
;

The aUanopadam shows the following forms

Sing, kuhhe kuhhase

Plur.

68

PALI ORAMMAE.

A consonantal

stem

is

y/tud *to push/ which

is

conjugated

exactly like bhavatO ' * y/rudh to restrain has the following forms
Sing, rundhdmi rundhaai

and

rundhlmi
rundhisi
rundhlti

rundhati
Plur. rundhdma

rimdhlma
rundhltha
rundhinti

rundhatha
rundhanti

A few verbs form their present tense by adding ccha to the

y/gam to go,' gacchdmi. There is, however, also a form gamati *he goes* and ghammati. This latter form can be substituted for all the
root, e.g.
*

forms of the verb.

Cpr. further

hravlti.

The
to

the root.

ya Class: The present tense of this class adds ya These form the third class of the native
All
the

grammarians.
applied, e.g.
:

phonetic rules regarding

y are

\/div
y/siv

-\-

ya ya ya

-\-\-

= =
=.

dihhati
sihhati

y/yudh

yujjhati

22.

MODES OF THE PRESENT TENSE.

:

It is formed by adding the endings given 1) Imperative on page 54 to the present stem. The second pers. sing. par. sometimes show the mere stems without the characteristic

ending.

As paradigms may
*

serve

y/i
I. sing,

to go.'
I.

emi
ehi

II.

II.

plur. etna etha

,,

III.
1

,,

etu

III.

entu

The

Sanskrit,

difference between these two conjugations can only be traced in where the accent is varying.

MODES OF THE PRESENT TENSE.

*

59

s/as
I.

to be.*
I. plur.

sing, asmi

asma
attha

II.

ahi
atthu
'

II.

III.

III.

8antu

\/da

to give.*
all

An

imperative can be formed from

:

the stems

in

use, e.g.

II. sing, dehi daddhi dajja

II. plur. detha daddtha

:

The attanopadam has the following forms

I. sing,

dade dadassu

I. plur.

daddmase
dadavho

II.

II.

III.

dadatam
'

III.

dadantam

II. sing,

kuru
karotu

III.
I.

y/kr to make.' II. plur. karotha karohi III. karontu kuhhantu kurufu
ATTANOPADAM.
I.

sing, kuhhe II. kurussu

plur. kubbdmase

II.

kuruvho

III.

kurutam
bhavdhi

III.

kubbantam

^Jbhu.
II. sing, bhava II. plur. bhavatha

III.

bhavatu

III.
ATTANOPADAM.

bhavantu

II. sing, bhavassu

II. plur. bhavavho

III.

bhavatam
*

III.

bhavantam

y/gam

to go.*
^.^7.
:

The Imperative is formed also from all the stems in use, II. sing, gaccha, gacchdhi, ghamma, ghammahi
:

2) Optative It is formed by adding the endings given The endings showed originally only forms on page 54.

combination, however, took place commencing with ya. in most cases with the final vowel of the stem. These forms

could again be contracted into As paradigms may serve

:

e.

y/bhu.
I. sing,

heyydmi, bhaveyya bhave huveyya,

I.

plur.

heyydma

60

GENERAL TENSES.
The endings
I.

61

are

FOR THB PARA8SAPADAM.

sing, a
e
I.

FOB THE ATTANOPADAM.

plur.

mha
ttha

I.

II.

II.

II.

sing, i ttho
ttha
i

mhe
vho
re

III.

III.

III.

Boots ending in consonants insert an

consonantal endings.

between stem and

As paradigms may
I.

serve

y/bhu.
sing, bahhuva
I.

plur. babhuvimha

11.

babhuve

II.

babhuvittha

III.

babhuca

III.
ATTANOPADAM.

babhuvu
plur. babhuvimhe

sing, babhuvi babhuvittho II.

I.

1.

II.

babhuvivho
babhuvire

III.

,,

babhuvittha

III.

62

TALI GRAMMAR.
Moreover, can be made in the syntactic use of the two
is

for both forms, which, however, turns out futile.

no

difference

tenses.

The paradigm of the native grammarians

hlyattanl (imperfect)
I.
:

for

the

ATTANOPADAM.
sing, a
,,

I.

plur.

amhd
attha

II.

II.

III.

III.
PAUA88AFADAU.

6
mhase

I. sing,

im
se

I.

plur,

II.

11.

rham
tthum

III.

ttha
aj/atani (aorist)
:

III.

For the
I.

ATTANOPADAK.
sing,

im
i

I.

plur.

imhd
tttha

II.

II.

III.

III.
PARA88APADAM.

tm
plur. imhe

inisu

I. sing,

a
ise

I.

II.

II.

III.

III.

ivham u

"We can distinguish altogether three different formations The augment a is in prose generally put before the In verse it is omitted according to the exigencies of verb.
in Piili.

the metre.

With

the negative particle

md

the aorist

is

used

as an imperative.

First Formation.
PA&AS8APADAM.
I. sing,

am
a,

I. plur.

amha
attha
urn

II.

II.

III.

III.
ATTANOPADAX.

I. sing.

I.

plur.

dmhase

II.

ase

II.

acham
atthum
is

III.

attha
first

III.
pcrs. sing. plur.

The

nasal in the

often omitted.

AORIST AND IMPERFECT.

63

Only verbs

in consonants

this formation.

form their preterite according to This formation can Its use is very limited.
if it is

be considered as an imperfect stem.

used with the present

Second Formation.

isum

G4 [

AORIST AND IMPERFECT.

II. sing. agaTichi

65

agancho

II. plur. agailchittha

III.
II.

agaTichi

III.

agailchimm

and III.

sing, agacchiai
y/vac.

I.

66

PALI GRAMMAR.

25.

FUTUEE.

tense sign is ss, which is added to the root directly, or the The endings are : by auxiliary vowel i. POB THB FARA88APADAM.
I.

The

CONDITIONAL.
In the same way
essatiy ehiti.

67
the
future

eti

to

'

go

has, besides

The contracted form

forms
I.
:

hoti

from hhavati shows the following

sing, hemiy hehdmi, hohdmi^ hessami, hehtssdmi, hohissami.

hest, hehisi, hohisi, hessasi, hehissasi, hohissasi.
heti, hetiti, hoiifi, hessati, hehissati, hohissati.

II.

III.
I.

plur. hema,

hehdma^ hohdma^ hessdma^ hehissdma, hO'

hehittha,

hissdma.
II.

hetha,

hohittha^

hessatha,

hehissafha,

hohissatha.

III.

henti, hehinti, hohinti, hessanti, hehissanti, hohissanti.

*

From
att.

y/su

to hear

'

future

att.

sussam,

^dd

dassati

and

dassam,

26.

CONDITIONAL.
is

Prom

the future stem

made an augment

preterite

by
:

prefixing the
I. sing,

augment
ssam
8se
{ssa)

a and adding the secondary endings

PARASSAPADAM.
I.

plur.

ssdmhd
ssatha

II.

II.

III.

ssd (ssa)

III. ATTANOPADAM.

ssamsu
plur. ssdmhase ssavhe

I.

sing, ssam
ssase

I.

II.

II.

III.

ssatha

III.

ssitmu
/.

The endings are added with The paradigm is

:

or without intervening

PARASSAPADAM.
I.

sing, abhavissam

I.

II.

abhavissa

88e

II.

plur. ahhavissdtnhd abhavissatha

III.

abhavma
abhavissam
abhavissase

88d

III.

abhavissamsu
plur. abhavissdmhase

ATTANOPADAM.
I. sing,
I.

II.

II.

III.

abhavissatha

III.

abhavmavhe abhavmiiMU

68

PALI GRAMMAR.

27.

DERIVATIVE CONJUGATION.
may
be divided under
to the
five

The

derivative conjugation
:

headings I. Passive: It
form.

is

formed through adding ya

weakest

are those of the altanopadam^ but also the those of parassapadam occur, y affects a preceding con-

The endings

sonant in the usual way. In a few instances iya is added instead of ya, and the endings of the passives are added to the present active.
Cpr.
vasiyati
e.g.
:

iicchate vuccati

from y/vac

to speak

'
;

vussati

from

\/va8

*to

dwell.'

kayyati karlyati kariyyati

* kayirati are given as passive to karoti. dlyati from y/dd to * to stand'; gamynte, gamiyaii give*; thlyate from \/thd

gacclnyate ' to take.'

II.

^J

gam

to

'

go

gheppati and gayhati to ganhati

The Intensive or
class,

Frequentative
is

is

formed
however,

by
is

reduplication.

Its conjugation

in accordance with the

second conjugational
peculiar.

the reduplication,

The reduplicating syllable is composed of a single consonant with a heavy vowel Idlappaii to lament ddddallati
'
'
:

to blaze.*

The reduplicating syllable has a final consonant taken from This consonant is a nasal which the end of the root.
substitutes
cahcalati.

any

other

consonant

cankamati

jahgamati

Not many instances of the intensive are met with. III. The Desiderative The desiderative stem is formed
:

from the simple root by the addition of a reduplication and by an appended sa. This sa affects of course the preceding
consonants.

Some

roots

traction of reduplication
for

form an abbreviated stem by a conand root together in one syllable.

;

Examples are, huhhukkati, yhhiij', pivdsati, y/pd\ vlmamsati mimams jigimsati, \/hr dicchati, y/dd. From every root can be formed IV. The Causative
;
:

a causative

this is

done by affixing aya to the strengthened

P^LRTICIPLES, INFINITIVES, GERUNDS.

root.

69

Tlie native
class.

grammarians range these verbs under the

seventh

This aya can optionally be contracted into e. Besides this formation, another is in use : apaya contracted into ape is

added

to the root.

A diflferentiation of meaning is sometimes

e,

to be traced.

If contracted into
first

conjugational class;

the conjugation follows of course the the forms in aya and apaya are
*

conjugated like bhavati. As causative of y/gam

gacchdpetiy gacchapayati
;

to

'

go
*

are given gamayati, gameti

'

yjhan

to kill

has haneti, ghdteti.

V. Denominatives
a denominative.
'

From
sufiixes
'
;

The

every noun may be formed employed are aya, aya, lya.

:

e.g.

ciceitdyati

to splash

'

piittlyati

to treat as a son.'

28.

PARTICIPLES, INFINITIVES, GERUNDS.

is

1)

The Participle Present

anta,

formed by the

suffixes at

and

which are added

to the present stem, e.g.: gacckanto

gaccham (see above, page 38). In the same way these suffixes are added to the future stem, to form 2) Participle Future. In the same way the suffixes mdna and dna are used for
the Present Participle Attanopada.

Perfect Participle in vams only a few left, tndu and viddasu for vidvams. 4) The Past Participle Passive is formed by the suffixes ta and na, which are added directly to the root or through an intervening vowel i. Of course all phonetic changes
3)

Of

the

doubtful traces are

take place
kato
'
'

made
*
;
'
;

' ;

'

'

gato
*
*

gone
'
;

icchito
'

wished
*
;

* ;

phuttho
vufto

touched

laddho

taken

vutto

spoken

vapifo

and

'

shaven
5)

dinuo
the

given.*

From

Past

Participle

Passive

is

formed a

secondary derivative with the meaning of a Past Participle by adding the suffixes rat, rant, e.g.
:

Active

manditard, manditahaving sacrificed * vanto having adorned hhtittard having eat^n.* II. Gerundives The suffixes by which gerundives are
;

hutavd hutavanlo
*

'

70

PALI GRAMMAR.

regularly and ordinarily formed are ya tavya (tabba tayya) aniya. They are joined with or without intervening vowel i. : bhabbo for bhavyo; karanlyo kdriyo kayyo kayiro kattabbo e.g.
:

ought to bo done be given.* to ought

that
III.

* ;

ddtayyo ddtabbo ddtabyo

that

Gerunds

ya tvdna between root and ending.

are united into one.

The gerund is formed by the suffixes tvd and tuna. They take arbitrarily the vowel i
:

Sometimes the

suffixes

ya and tvd

Remarkable forms are

datfhu
anuvicca

and

disvd

having
*

seen.'

anuviditvd

dhacca

dhanitrd

'

having known.' having thrown.*

*

pappuyya
vineyya
*

pdpayitcd
*

vinayitvd

having obtained.' having laid aside.'

nicchcyya having ascertained.' * Cpr. further passitvdna and passituna having seen.' atmtvd and atikkamitvd 'having approached.*
:

having given.* having made.* gayha, ganhiya, ganhitvd having taken.*

katvdna, kdiuna
*

datvd, ddya, daditvd

'

IV. Infinitives They are formed by the suffixes turn The infinitive can be formed from the and tave, rarely tuye. or from the root in both cases an i is special base,
:

arbitrarily inserted * to e.g. gantum

*

speak
*

laddhiim go sunitum and aotave to hear

;

to take
'

*
;

vaditum
*

to

vippahatave

to give

*
;

up

ganetuye

to count.'

29.

INDECLINABLES.
I.

Adverbs.

ADVERBS FORMED BY SUFFIXES.

Classes of adverbs are formed
suffixes not only to

by the addition of adverbial

also to

pronominal roots or stems, but stems. and noun adjective

INDECLINABLES.

71

Most of these

sufl&xes

belong to a time anterior to the

fixing of the Piili, as a comparison with Sanskrit cognate languages will show.
1)

and the

standing for an original

it is

tas.

It gives to the

word

to

which

also a local.

and nouns.

added mostly an ablative sense, but sometimes It may be added to pronouns, prepositions In the last case it is regarded as the regular
:

substitute for the termination of the ablative (see page 41). ' ' Examples are from pronominal stems ato hence ; i(o
*

here
2)
3)

'
;

tato

from that place

:

*
;

'

t/ato
*

from what
'
;

' ;

etc.

From prepositions From noun and

*

abhito

near

parato

further.*

dalikhinato
pitthito

on the from the back

is

'

adjective stems: aggato 'before*; ' * south ; sahbato * from every side ;
'
; *

pitito

II.

Adverbs of a
either

local sense are

on the father's side.' formed by an original

ita

tra.

This tra

preserved or assimilated to

or ttha

(page 16).

It
:

is

added to pronominal roots and nouns.

'
*

Examples are

1) atra, attha here ; tatra and tatiha ' kuttha where,' 2) annatra and annatlha ' yattha, ubhayatta in both places.'

'

there

'
;

kutra and
' ;

'

elsewhere

ubha-

The forms
also

dha and assimilated ha also form adverbs with a local sense. are used promiscuously: t'ha and idha 'here.'
Interchangeable with this last suffix are ham and him ' * forming local adverbs kuhirn, ktiham, kaham where ;
: ; *

taham, tahwi
III.
suffix
* '

there

' ;

yahini

where.'
* '

as

Adverbs of manner are formed by means of the thd mostly from pronominal roots tathd so yatha ' but also from adjectives, e.g. sabbatha in every way
:

annathd

By

in another way.* means of the suffix

'

ti

or Hi. of

This adverb
narrative,

is

very
of

extensively

used

in

cases

indirect

or

enumeration, or of quoting the words and thoughts of others. By means of the suffix or ira ' like as.' By the side of

iva also viya

and

va.

The former seems a metathesis

*

of iva
to

eva
'

and
'
;

thus

yera, heca ' ' kiva how ?

just,

even

'
;

evam related

em
:

IV. Adverbs of time are formed by means of the

suflix

dd

72
hadd
'
'

PALI GRAMMAR.

when

*
;

ya</d

whenever
*

* ;

sadd

and sabbadd

always.*

Related to da seems di in padi if.' 2. By means of the compound suffix

ddnlm.
3.

ddni,
*

ddnim

for

iddni, iddnim
*
;

now

'
;

taddni, taddnim
rhi)

then.*
etarahi,

By By

means of the
'

suffix rahi (Skr.

'

and

seldom etarhi

now

tarahi

then.*

means of the suffix dhd are formed adverbs, from numerals, signifying fold, times.' especially ' * ' in one way etc. bahudhd * in many ways Cpr. ekadhd,
V.
* ; ;

sabbadhd

'

sabbadhi \see page 49). VI. Adverbs of quantity, or measure, or manner, are formed by means of the suffix so, Skr. 9as. e.g. bahuso
:

everywhere.* used with the same sense

Sometimes we find the

suffix d/ii

'

'

' ;

greatly
atthaao
*

paTicaso

by

fives

* ;

akkharaso

letter

by

letter

'
;

according to the sense.'

VII. Case Forms used as Adverbs.

A large number of adverbs have cas.e-suffixes, from stems which are or are not otherwise in use. 1) The Accusative i/am with the meaning of that, as, tarn (tad) kiin idam became there, thither why
*
:

'

'

'

here.'

Compounded with
then after
*

id

we have
*

cid=.ca-\-id: ce 'even,*

and

false

analogy noce
*

if

not

'

instead of
:

tie.

Noun and adjective ndma by name

;

stems so used are

raho
'

'

secretly
*
'

rattam
ciram
*

at night
' ;

saccam
'

in truth

* ;

niccam

always

long

bhlyo

nouns and adjectives we sider several adverbs of obscure connection

like

again.' As accusatives of

must also conwhich go back

to a period
*
;

most of the preceding in their formation

:

anterior to Pali.
e.g.
*

ittn/ii
' ;

'

silently
'

sdyam
' ;

in

the evening
' *

aram
* ;

speedily

alam
*
;

enough
'
:

mitho and mithu

*
;

mutually

sammd
2)

'

fully

ac^jju

instantly

isam

little.'

The Instrumental

Most of the pronominal adjective

ace. occur in adverbial use
:

and noun-stems noticed under

INDECLINABLES.

73

cirena
3)
sense,

yena 'because, for which*; dakkhinena 'on the south'; ' * * diva by day ; amd * with.* after a long time
' ;

The Dative
e.g.
*
; :

It
*

is less

cirdya
'

for a

extensively used in an adverbial * * for the long time ; sukhdya

benefit

hitdya

for the benefit.'

:

4)

The Ablative
* ' ;

used adverbially, durd, drd far off

e.g.

Most of the pronominal stems are kasmd why ? yasmd because

' '
'

'

under, below ; paccbd behind.' The original of the ablative d is of necessity lost in Pali. Its use is very limited, kissa e.g. 5) The Genitive
heithd
: :

'

'

why
6)

'
;

cirassa

long
:

hetu

and

heto

'

on account

of.'
:

The Locative
' ;

Forms
dure
*

adverbially used are,

e.g.

hhuvi

on the earth

dre,

after.'

II. Prepositions.

of upasagga (prepositions) the native grammarians comprise a number of twenty words, which modify the meaning of the verb or substantive to which

Under the name

they are added.

Put

in alphabetical order they are as follows

^ati 'over, beyond.'

t adhi

above, over, superior

to.'

\anu 'after, under, ^apa 'away, from.'

'

less than.'

ajn

near, close by.'

'

to, unto, against.' aca 'away, down, oft.' * t d until, as far as.'
t*

abhi

ud
'

upwards, above.'
less.'

tj5rt

below,

du 'hardly.' nir * downwards.'

ni {nir)
'

outward.'
'

pa 'forward, onward.'
"^pati or pati

towards.'

pard
pari

'

away, aside, back.*

around, about.'

'

74
ri
*

I*ALI

GRAMMAR.

apart, asunder.'
*

8am
8ti

with, together.*

*well.*

must bo added a few others, which are with combined verbs and nouns, but are of a more equally
these words

To

limited use, such as

fanto antara 'within.*

t<f

'manifestly, close.'
*

tiro

across, beyond.'
*

pdtu manifestly.' These are mainly used in composition with the verbs a,
hhuy kr.

and adverbs and marked govern nouns. To these must be added a few words, which are used like modern prepositions and adverbs and only comparatively seldom in combination with verbs and nouns, e.g.
All
of the

above-mentioned

particles

f are used as prepositions,

adho

below.*
*

uddham ubbham
tiriyam 'across.*

upwards.*

pacchd 'behind.*
pararn 'beyond,
'

after.*

piird bahi

before.'

'

outwards.'

rite 'except.*

vind
saha,

without.*
'

samam, saddhim

with.*

30.

COMPOUNDS.

Stems which admit of inflection are, as in other languages, combined to form compounds, which are treated as if simple in respect to inflection and construction.
1)

COMPOUNDS.

75

2) As regards compounds, seldom more than two or three stems are combined in the older language; but, as in Sanskrit, the later the language is, the more compounds,

and cumbrous compounds

3) It
Piili
is

prevail.

of course difficult to determine which

itself,

compounds

has formed

and which

it

has in

other
find

sort of Indian languages. words compounded according to rules which are no more in abeyance in Pali ; but even that does not prove con-

common with criterion is, if we

clusively that a

compound belongs
*

as

commonwealth
'

to the

Indian languages.
e.g.
:

sappuriso Skr. satpurusha

*

Skr. pumlinga

a good man ; pullihgam in later Pali we find for which manhood,'

pumalingam. 4) These compounds

classes
:

may

be divided into three principal

I.

Copulative or Aggregative Compounds (dvandm).

are coordinate; in uncom pounded condition ' ca and.' Examples are very

The members
numerous.

they would be joined with

The whole has the gender and member, and is in number a plural,
pakkhtno.

declension of
e.g.
:

its

last

elaka-miga-sukara-

The compound, without regard

the gender of
its

to the

number denoted

or

constituents,

becomes a singular

collective.

The gender
e.g.
:

is

mostly neuter.

hiriottappam

ndmarupam
ddUddsa^i
ahoratto,

= = =

hiri

ndmam
ddsi

+ + +

ottappam

rupam
ddso

ahoratti,

ahoraftam
also

kusalakusalamy
plural

dhammddhammo, but dhammddhammd.

:

as a

Puma pum of
:

a male

'

has two bases in composition

*

the former

puma and we have itthipumam male and female ;

*

of the latter pumitthi 'masculine and feminine.' Nouns, adjectives and particles are not

infrequently

76

PALI GRAMMAR.

repeated to give an intensive or distributive repetitional

meaning,
'

e.g.

divase divase

village

gdmagdmam village after day after day anhamahnam mutually punapunam again and
; *

'

'

again/
II.

Determinative Compounds
;

(fappurisa).

There are two divisions

1)

Dependent compounds=the tappurisa proper, in which the prior member is a substantive word standing to the other in the relation of a case dependent on it. 2) Descriptive corQpo\md8=^kammadfidraj/a, in which the prior member is an adjective, or another word having the value of an adjective qualifying a noun.
I.

Dependent Compounds.
course

They

can

of
'

be used
'

either

substantively or
'

adjectivel3%
feet
'
* ;

The case relation may be of any kind. hrahmaloko Brahma world padodakam water
;

for the

accharasambhavo
'
;

'

descent from a
' *
*

'

nymph
' ;

saccavadi
'

truthful
*

dhammadharo
for

versed in the law

sarandgama-

versed in the law ; refuge ; veddgu going * born blind ; apahbajitasadiso * like one who has jaccandho * ' ' ' ' given up the world ; tadko like him ; mddiso like me ;
*

nam

thdlipakko

cooked in a

pot.'
*

The order of the members which form such compounds may be inversed addhamdso and mdsaddho half a month
'
:

pitdmaho

a grandfather.* sakhd JRqjan, (sak/ri), if employed as last members of a all the forms known from the declension. exhibit compound,

As

first

member
'

of a

compound
' ;

rq/an has the base rq/d

the
:

last rq/d only form allowed in Kosalarujd king of Kosala.' rqjabhayam fear from a king Sometimes stems not in use as simple words are employed
is
'

the nom. case as

member

This looks as if a declined stem has as first members. been used; but the dependency is not always such as to manasikdro attention.' favour such an explanation, e.g.
'
:

COMPOUNDS.
II.

77

Descriptive Compounds {kammadharaya).

of course sometimes difficult to say whether the comtappurusa or kammadharaya. pound mahanto 'great' takes in composition the weak forms mahd
It
is
is

and mahat,

santo

Examples

are

being, good, true,' the weak form sat. ' * blue lotus ; sahbaseto nihippalam

all

white'; j9?"yflr;wraf^o 'speaking kindly'; rajassald 'amenstruous woman*; sappuriso 'a good man'; saddhammo 'good doctrine'; mahapphalo mahdpumo very fruitful great virtue mahesi great sage hetuppabhavo 'proceeding from a cause';
' '
* ' ; ; '
' ;

kacchurakhasd

'

scab.'

The
ana
*

adverbial words which

as prior
'

are

most
'

frequently
:

and
an,
*

commonly used

members of compounds are

*

or,

the negative particle ; sm ' well ; dus 'with.' e.g.: asankhato 'the unconditioned'; ' ' from debt ; duppuro ' difficult to fill sucinno
;

sa badly anano 'free

;

'

well done

' ;

saseno

with an army ku as former part of

takes

'

*
;

'

salajjo

ashamed.'

many compounds designates inferiority.

kicd,

It

the

forms
'

kad,
'

ku, e.g.
'

kunnadl
;

an in'

significant river

kadannam

bad food

kuditthi

wrong

view/
Closely related
to

Numeral Compounds
singular.

preceding class are III. the The whole is made a neuter {digu).

the

A
'

two cows

sample of this sort of compound is digii, 'itself worth ' ' further tidandam ' three staves ; ticlvaram ;
*

three robes

tlham

'

three days.*

IV. Adverbial Compounds (abyaylbhdm).

They

are also closely related to the Determinative com-

pounds. They are formed in joining prepositions and adverbs to a noun, and are then used as abstracts, collectives,

and simply adverbially

'

pleasure
'

as

if

according to one's ' but yathdrucito as liked, pleasant yathdmato ' ' ' dead sampahdro aampq/amam wounding
:

'

yathdnicim
*

'

consciousness

*
;

apacdro

approach.*

78

PALI GRAMMAR.

V. All the preceding compounds

may be
:

used adjectively,
*

free from Bahuhbihi, e.g. rltarago ' a man from free but puruso vltardgo passion, an passion ; * * ' the five sorts of vision but as an arhat ; paTicacakkhu ;

and are then

*

called

* epithet of the Buddha, pancacakkhit man possessing the five ' * * but sorts of vision ; anupubbam regular succession
;

regular, successive* destruction.*

anupubbo

anupubbo nirodho 'successive

In a few cases compounds are fotTned from words not

usually put together, e.g. of adverbs. vitatho 'false, unreal '=n+^rt^Aa; yathdtatho 'real, true*:= * f/athd+tafhd. e.g. of a phrase itihdHO tradition*; itivuttam
:

or itivuttakam
*

of a book, a legend * conceit of Qw^evioriiy =.aham-\- aham.

'

name

'

ahamahamikam

All these compounds were formed before Pali became

a literary dialect.

HANDBOOK OF
II.

PALI.

CHRESTOMATHY.

THE PARITTAM, BEING EXTRACTS FROM THE SUTTA PITAKAM.

NAMO TASSA :BHAGAyATO AEAHATO SAMMA

SAMBUDDHASSA.
Buddham saranam gaccliiTmi. Dhammani saranam gacchami.
Saiigham saranam gacchami. Dutiyam pi Buddham saranam gacchami. Dutiyam pi Dhammam saranam gacchami. Dutiyam pi Sangham saranam gacchiimi.

Tatiyam Tatiyam Tatiyam

pi pi
pi

Buddham saranam gacchami.

Dhammam

saranam gacchami. Sangham saranam gacchami.

SARANAGAMAXAM.

1) Paniitipata

2)
3) 4)
5)

veramani sikkhjipadam. Adinnadana veramani sikkhiipadain. Abrahmacariya veramani sikkhapadam. Musavada veramani sikkhapadam. veramani Sura-meraya-majja-pamudatthana

sikkha-

padam.
6) Vikalabhojana veramani sikkhapadam.

7) Nacca-glta-vadita-visukadassana veramani sikkhiipadam.

8) Mala-gandha-vilepana-dharana-mandana-vibhnsanattha-

na veramani sikkhapadam.
6

82

8AMANERAPANHA. DVATTIM8AKABA.
9) UccHsayana-mahiisayana veramanl sikkhapadam.

10) Jiitarupa-rajata-patiggahanii veramani sikkhapadam.

DASASIKKHAPADANI.

'

Eka niima kirn ? Dve niima kim ? Tini nama kira ?

Pafica niima

'

'

" Sabbe satta iiharatthitika." " Namanca

riipaiica."
'

Cattari niima kira ?

kim

'

?
'

Cha nama

kira ?

" Tisso vedana." ' " Cattari ariyasaccani." " Pane' upiidiinakkhandhii." " Cha " Satta bojjhahgii."

ajjhattikiini ayatanani.**

'Satta niima
* *

kim

?
'

Attha nama kira ?

"
"

Ariyo atthahgiko maggo."

'

Nava niima kim ? Dasa nama kim ?

Nava

sattiiviisii."

'

" Dasah' angehi samannagato araMti

vuccati ti."

SAMANERAPANHAM.

Atthi imasmim kiiye

kesa,

lomii,

nakhii,

danta,

taco,

mamsam,

nahiiru,

atthI,

atthiminjii,

vakkam,

hadayam,

yakanara, kilomakam, pihakam, papphiisain, antam, antagunam, udariyam, karlsam, pittam, seraham, pubbo, lohitam,
sedo, raedo, assu,
vasii,

khelo, einghiinikii, lasika, muttam,

ti.

matthake matthaluhgan

DVATTIMSAKAEAM.

Patisankhii yoniso cTvarara patiseviimi yiivad eva sitassa

patighiitiiya damsa-makasa-viit&tapasirimsapa-samphassiinara patighatiiya yavad eva hiri-kopina
patighiitiiya

unhassa

paticchadanattham.

i|

1|

Patisankhii yoniso pindapiitara patiseviimi n'eva daviiya na

madaya na mandaniiya na
kayassa
thitiyii
:

vibhiisaniiya,

yiivadeva imassa

yiipanaya vihims(iparatiyii
puriinailca

brahmacariylL-

nuggahaya

iti

vedanam patisaiikhami navanca

PACCAVEKKHANA.
vedanam na

DASADHAMMASUTTA

83

uppadessJimi, yairU. ca

me

bhavissati anavajjata

ca phasuvihiiro c&ti. ||2|| Patisankhji yoniso senasanam patisevaml yiivadeva sitassa

patighataya unhassa patighiitiiya darasaraakasavatatapasirira-

sapasamphassanain patighataya yavadeva utuparissiiya vino-

danam patisallanaramattham.
tisevatni

||3||

Patisaukhji yoniso gilanapaccaya-bhesajjaparikkharam pa-

yavadeva uppannanam veyyabadhikariara vedana||4||

nam

patighataya abyapajjhaparamataysLti.

PACCAVEKKHANA.

Evam me sutam Ekaip

:

saraayaip

Bhagava Siivatthiyam

Tatra kho Anathapindikassa arame. ' * bhikkhavo ti 'bhadante' ti. bhikkhu amantesi Bhagava Te bhikkhu Bhagavato paccassosum. Bhagava etad avoca
viharati

Jetavane

"Dasa

ime, bhikkhave,

dhamma

pabbajitena abhinham

pacca vekkh itabba. Katame dasa ?

1)

Vevanuiyamhi ajjhupagato

ti

pabbajitena abhinham

pacca vekkhitabbam.
2) Parapatibaddha vekkhitabbam.
3) Aiino

me jivika ti pabbajitena abhinham pacca-

me akappo karaniyo ti pabbajitena abhinham vekkhitabbam pacca 4) Kacci nu kho me attasllato na upavadatiti pabbajitena abhinham paccavekkhitabbam. 5) Kacci nu kho mam anuvicca vinnil sabrahmacari sllato na upavadantiti pabbajitena abhinham paccavekkhitabbam. 6) Sabbehi me piyehi manapehi njinabhavo vinabhavo ti pabbajitena abhinham paccavekkhitabbam. 7) Kamraassa komhi kamma-dayado kamma-yoni kammabandhu kamma-patisarano, yam kamraam karissami kalyiinam va papakarn va tassa day ado bhavissamiti pabbajitena abhin.

ham
8) tena

paccavekkhitabbam. Eatham bhutassa me rattindiva vitipatantiti pabbaji-

abhinham paccavekkhitabbam.

84
9) Kacci

MAHAMANGALASUTTA.
nu kho 'ham sunnagiire abhiramiimiti pabbajU

tena abhinhara paccavekkhitubbara. lOj Atthi nu kho rae uttariraanussadhammii alaraan'yananadassanaviseso adhigato so *hara pacchime kiile sabbrahraacarl puttho na

manku

bhavissiiiuiti pabbajitena

abhinham

paccavekkhitubbara.

Ime kho bhikkhave

ti.

dasa

dhammu

pabbajitena abhinham

paccavekkhitabba Idam avoca Bhagavii

attamanii te bhikkhu

Bhagavato

bhasitam abhinandun

ti.

DASADHAMMASITTTA.

Evam me
viharati
afinatara

sutani

Ekara samayam Bhagava Savatthiyam

Aniithapindikassa

Jetavane
devata

arame.

Atha

kho

abhikkantiiyii

rattiya

abhikkantavanna

kevalakappam Jetavanam obhiisetva, yena Bhagava ten' Bhagavantam abhivadetvii upasankamitva upasankami ekamantam atthasi. Ekaraantam ^hita kho sa devata Bhaga-

vantam gathaya ajjhabhasi

"

Bahu deva manussa ca mangalani acintayum bruhi mahgalara Akankharaana sotthanam mam." 1
:
|| 1|

utta-

Asevana ca balanam,
Puja ca pujanlyanam

panditiinafica sevana,
:

etam mangalam uttamara.'

||2||

Patirupa desaviiso ca pubbe ca katapunfiata Atta sammapanidhi ca etam mangalam uttamam.'

:

||

1|

Subhasita ca
*

Bahusaccafica sipparica vinayo ca susikkhito, etam mangalain uttamam.' yii vaca

:

||

1|

Matapitu upatthiinara putta-diirassa sangaho

Anakula ca kammantii: etam mangalam uttamam.'

*

||5||

Diinanca dhammacariya ca fiatakiinanca sangaho Anavajjani kammani: etam mangalam uttamam.*

||6||

Arati virati papa majjapiina ca saftftamo Appamado ca dhammesu: etam mangalam uttamam.'

||7||

RATANASUTTA.
*

85

Garavo ca

niviito ca santutthi ca katafifiufa

||

Kiileua dliarama-savanam: etam mangaluni uttamam.*

*

8||

KhantI ca sovacassata saraanananca dassanara Kalena dhamma-sukacchu: etam mangalam uttamam.'

||9

1|

Tapo ca brahmacariya ca
Nibbana-sacchikiriya ca:

ari3'a8accana' dassanam etam mangalam uttamam.'

||10||

Phutthassa lokadharamehi cittara yassa na karapati

Asokam virajam khemam: etam mangalam uttamam.'

*

||

11

1|

Etadisani katviina sabbattha-m-aparajita

Sabbatha sotthim gacchanti: tesam mangalam utamam 12 ti.'

II
II

MAHAMANGALASUTTAM.

Yanidha bhutani samagatani bhummiini va yani va antalikkhe sabb' evabliiitii suraana bhavantu
atho pi sakkacca sunantu bhasitam.
||

1|

Tasmahi bhuta nisiimetha sabbe mettam karotha manusiya pajaya

diva ca ratto ca haranti ye balim

tasmahi ne rakkhattha appamatta.

||2||

Yam

kiiici

vittam idha va hurara va

saggesu va yain ratanam panltam

idaTn pi

na no samam atthi Tathiigatena buddhe ratanam panltam

||

etena saccena suvatthi hotu.

1|

Khayam viriigam amatam panltam Yad ajjhagii Sakyamuni samiihito na tena dhammena sam' atthi kifici. idam pi dhamme ratanam panltam
etena saccena suvatthi hotu.
11

11

86

BATANASUTTA.

Yam

buddhasettho parivannuyi sucim

anantarikail Aatn uhu samadhinu tena samo na vijjati idam pi dhamme ratanara panltam

samudhim

etena saccena suvatthi hotu.

||

1|

Ye
te

puggalu attha satam pasattha

yugani honti dakkhineyya Sugatassa siivaka etesu dinnjini mahapphalani. idarn pi sanghe ratanam panltam
cattari etani

etena saccena suvatthi botu.

||

1|

suppayuttji manasii dalhena nikkcTraino Gotama-siisanamhi

te pattipattii

Ye

amatam vigayha

laddhji raudha nibbutim bbunjamauii

idam

pi

sanghe ratanam panltam

||

etena saccena suvatthi hotu.

1|

Yath' indakhllo pathavira

site siyii

catubbhi viitebhi asampakampiyo

tathApamara sappurisara vadami

yo ariyasaccani avecca passati idam pi sanghe ratanaip panltam

etena saccena suvatthi hotu.
||8
i|

Ye

ariya-saccani vibhavayanti gam'bhlra-pannena sudesitani

kincapi te honti bhusapparaatta

na te bhavam atthamam jidiyanti idam pi sanghe ratanam panltam

etena saccena suvatthi hotu.
||

1|

Sahav* assa dassana-sampadiiya tay* assu dhammii jahitii bhavanti

sakkilyaditthi vicikicchitanca

sThibbatam va pi yad atthi kifici catuh' apayehi ca vippamutto

RATANASUTTA.
cha cabhitthjlniini abhabbo katum

$7

idam

pi saiighe ratanain panltam. etena saccena suvatthi hotu. 10

||

|j

Kiiicapi so kararaam karoti pilpakam

kciyena vacii uda cetasii va

abhabbo so tassa paticchiidaya abhabbata ditthapadassa vutto

idam

pi

sanghe ratanain panltam

||

etena saccena suvatthi hotu.

11

1|

Vanappagumbe yatha phussitagge gimhana-mase pathamasmim gimhe tathupamam dhammavaram adesayl

nibbanagarairn pararaam hitiiya idam pi buddhe ratanain panitani etena saccena suvatthi hotu. 12
||

1|

Varo
idam

varaiifiu

varado varaharo
adesayl

anuttaro
pi

dhammavaram

buddhe ratanam panltam

||13||

etena saccena suvatthi hotu.

Khinara puranam navam n'atthi sambhavam

virattacitta ayatike

bhavasmim

te khina-bija avirulhicchanda nibbanti dhTra yathaj'am padlpo

idam

pi

etena saccena suvatthi hotu.

sanghe ratanam panltam 14

||

1|

Yiinidha bhutani samagatani bhummiini va yani va antalikkhe

Tathiigatam deva-manussa-pujitam

Buddhara namassiiraa suvatthi hotu.

||

15

1|

Yanidha bhutani samagatani

bhummani va yani va

antalikkhe

Tathagatam deva-manussa-pujitara dhammam namassama suvatthi hotu.

l|16l|

88

KARANlYAMETTASUTTA.
Yitiiidha bhutani saroilgatuni

bhummJini

yuni va antalikkho Tathiigatain de vumanussa-puj itam

vii

sangbam namassuma

suvattbi hotu. ||17|

RATANA8UTTAM.

Karanlyara attbakusalena

yan tain santara pad am abbisamecca Sakko uju ca siiju ca

siivaco c'assa

mudu

anatimual.

||

1|

Santussako ca subbaro ca
appakicco ca sallabukavutti santindriyo ca nipako ca

appagabbbo ca kulesu ananugiddbo.

||2|

Na

ca kbuddara samiicare
vinnii pare
vii

kiilci

yena

sukbino

upavadeyyum kbemino bontu

||4||

sabbe satta bbavantu sukbitattu.

Ye

tasii vii tbiivarii vii

keci panabbut* attbi anavasesii

vii

digbii

ye mabantii
rassakii

vii
tbillii. ||4||

majjbimii
Dittbii
vii

anuku

ye va

adittbii

ye ca diire vasanti avidiire

bbiltii vii

sambbavesi

vii

sabbe

sattii

bbavantu

sukkbitattii.

||

1|

Na

paro param nikubbetba n&timafinetba kattbaci nam kinci

byarosanii patigba-sannii

n&tlfiamannasa
Miitii yatbii
iiyusii

dukkbam

iccbeyya.

||6||

niyam puttam ekaputtam anurakkbe

KIIANDHAPARITTA.

89

evam pi sabbabhutesu manasam bhiivaye aparimanam.

Mettafica sabbalokasmira

||

1|

manasam bhavaye aparimanam uddham adho ca tiriyanca

asambiidhara averara asapattam.
||8||

Tittham carara nisinno va sayiino va yavat' assa vigatamiddho etam satim adhittheyya brahmam etam viharam idha-m-ahu.
Dittbiiica
sllavii

||9||

anupagamma

dassanena sampanno
etiti.

kamesu vineyya gedham nahi jatu gabbhaseyyam punar

||

10

1|

karanIyamettasuttam.

Evam me

sutam

Ekam samayam

Bhagavji Savatthiyam

Tena kho pana vlharati Jetavane Anathapindikassa iiriime. auiiataro bhikkhu ahina dattho samayena Savatthiyam
kalankato
hoti.

Atha kho sarabahula bhikkhu yena Bha-

gava
te

ten'

abhivadetvii

upasaiikamirasu upasankamitvu Bhagavantara ekamantam nisldimsu ekamantaiu nisinna kho

:

bhikkhu Bhagavantam etad avocum Idha bhante, Savatthiyam aufiataro bhikkhu ahina dattho
ti.'

kalankato

"Na
bhikkhu

ha

nuna

so,

ahiiajakuhTni mettena cittena phari.

cattari ahirajakuhTni

bhikkhave, bhikkhu imani cattari Sace hi so bhikkhave

mettena cittena phareyya

kiilara

na

hi so, bhikkhave,

bhikkhu ahina dattho

ahirajakuUmi ?
ahirajakulam

kareyya."
ahiraja-

Katamani
kulain,

cattari

Virupakkham
Chabyaputtara

Eriipatham

ahiraja-

kulam Kanhjigotaraakam ahirajakulam. Na ha nuna so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imani

kuliini

cattari ahiraja-

mettena cittena phari.

Sace hi

so,

bhikkhave, bhikkhu

90

METTASUTTA.
na hi

80 bhikkhave

imitni cattilri ahiiajukulani mcttena cittena pharcyya, bhikkhu ahinii dattho kiilam kareyya.

Anujiinami, bhikkhave,
cittena

inailni cattiiri

ahimjakulani mettena

pharitum
:

attaguttiya attarakkbiiya attaparittayati.

Idam avoca Bhagava. Idam vatva Sugato athdparaai etad

avoca
satthii

Viriipakkhehi
ca.

me mettara, mettam Eriipathehi me Chabyiiputtehi me mettam, mettam Kanhagotamakehi

mil

Apadakehi me mettara, mettam dvipiidakehi me catuppadehi me mettam mettam bahuppadehi me.

||2||

Ma mam apudako himsi, ma mam himsi dvipadako ma mam cattuppado himsi ma mam himsi bahuppado.
Sabbe
satta sabbe panii sabbe

||

1|

bhuta ca kevala
kinci

sabbe bhadrani passantu,

ma

papam agama

||4||

Appamiino buddho, appamjino dhammo, appamano sangho pamanavantani sirimsapani ahivicchika satapadi unnana;

bhisarabu musika.

Kata me rakkhii, kata me paritta, patikkamantu bhQtani, 'ham namo Bhagavato namo sattannam sammasambuddhanam.
so

KHANDHAPARITTAM.

Ekara samayam Bhagava Savatthiyam Tatra kho viharati Anathapindikassa ariirae. Bhagava bhikkhii amantesi: "bhikkhave" ti, "bhadante" ti.
:

Evam me sutam
Jetavane

Te bhikkhii Bhagavato paccassosum.

"Mettaya, bhikkhave, cetovimuttiya,
bahullkatiiya,

Bhagava etad avoca

iisevitaya,

bhiivitaya,

yanikataya, vatthukataya, anutthitiiya paricitaya susamaraddhiiya ekadasdnisarasa patikankhii. Katame ekadasa ?

1)
2)

Sukham supati. sukham patibujjhuti.

na pitpakam supinam
passati.

8)

METTANISAMSAM.
4) manussanam piyo hoti.
6) amanussilnam piyo hoti.
6) devata rakkhanti. 7) nassa aggi va visara

91

vii

sattham va kamati.

8) tuvatam cittara saraadhlyati.

mukhavanno vippasldati. 10) asammulho kalara karoti.

9)
11) uttarim appativijjhanto brahmalokupago hot!
Mettaj'a,
ti.

bhikkhave,

cetovimuttiya

asevittiya

bhavitaya

baliullkata3'a yanikataya vatthukatiiya anutthitaya paricitaya

susamaraddhaya

Idam avoca Bhagava

bhasitam abliinandunti.

ime ekadasanisarasa patikahkhii ti. attamana te bhikkhu Bhagavato

:

METTASUTTAM.

Pahuta-bhakkho bbavati vippavuttho saka ghara bahu nam upajlvaati yo mittanam na dubhati. 1
||

1|

Yam yam janapadam

sabbattha
piijito hoti

yati nigiime rajadhaniyo

yo mittanam na dubhati.

||2|j

Nissa cora pasahanti natimanfieti khattiyo sabbe amitte tarati yo mittanam na dubhati.

||3||

Akkuddho sagharam eti sabhaya patinandito natlnam uttamo hoti yo mittanam na dubhati.

||4||

Sakkatva sakkato hoti garu hoti sagaravo Tanna-kitti-bhato hoti yo mittanam na dubhati.

||

1|

vandako pativandanara yasokittinca pappoti yo mittanam na dubhati.

Pujako labhate

piijara

||6||

pajjalati devata va virocati siriya ajahito hoti yo mittaaam na dubhati. ||7H

Aggi yatha

tassa pajiiyanti khette vuttara viruhati puttanam phalam asnati yo mittanam na dubhati.

Gavo

||8||

92
Darlto pabbatiito

MORAPARITTA.
vil

rukkhiito patito naro

||9||

cuto patittham labhati yo inittiiuam na dubhati.

Virulharanlasantiinam nigrodham iva raiiluto amitta nappasahanti yo raittiinam na dubhatiti.

||10||

METTANISAMSAM.

Udet* ayain cakkhumii

ekariijii

ha^rissa-vanno pathavippabhiiso, tani tam namassarni harissavannam pat.havippabhiisam,

tay' ajja guttii

viharemu divasam.

||

1|

Ye briihraanii vedagu sabbadhamrae te me namo te ca mam piilayantu,

Nam' atthu buddhilnam, nam' atthu namo vimuttanam, namo vimuttiyii
bodhiyii
!
||

||

Imam

so parittam katvii,

moro

carati esanu.

Apet* ayam cakkhuma ekaraja harissavanno pathavippabhiiso,

tam tam namassarni harissavannam pathavippabhiisam

tay' ajja guttii

viharemu

rattirn.

||

3||

Ye brahraanii vedagu sabbadhamrae te me namo te ca mam piiUiyantu,

Nam' namo
atthu buddhiinam, nam' atthu bodhiyii!
vimuttiinara,

namo

vimuttiyii

\\4

|)

Imam

so parittam katvii,

moro

viisara akappayiti.

MORAPARITTA M.
Evam ne sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagavii Siivatthiyara Tena kho pana viharati, Jetavane Aniithapindikassa iiriime. samayena Candiraii devaputto Riihuhii asurindena gahlto
hoti.

Atha kho Candimii devaputto Bhagavantam anussaratiiyam vehlyara

mano

imam

giithain abhiisi

CANDArARITTA.
*

03
I

Namo

te

Buddha-v!r* atthu
'si

vippamutto
tassa rae

sabbadhi

sambiidha-patipanno 'smi

saranam bhavati.'

||

1|

Atha kho Bhagavii Candimara devaputtam arabbha Eiihum

asurindam gathaya ajjhabbasi.
"

Tatbugatam arabantam Candima saranam gato

Rabu Candam pamuncassu Buddbu lokanukampakati." ||2||

!

Atba kbo Rabu asurindo Candimam devaputtam muncitvii

yena Yepacitti asurindo ten' upasaukami upasankamitva samviggo lomabattbajato ekamantam attbasi ekamantara tbitara kbo Kabum asurindam Vepacitti asurindo
taramanarupo
giitbaya ajjbabbiisi
**
:

Kin nu santaramiino

'va

Eahu

Candam pamuncasi
tittbasitl."
||3||

samviggarupo agamraa
kin nu bbito 'va
*

Sattadba

me

pbale

muddba

jivanto na sukbam labbe. Buddbagiitbabbiglto 'mbi

no ce munceyya Candiman

ti.

||4l|

CANDAPARITTA

..

Evam me sutam

Ekam samayam Bbagava

Siivattbiyain

vibarati Jetavane Anatbapindikassa arame.

Tena kbo pana

samayena Suriyo devaputto Rabunti asurindena gablto boti. Atba kbo Suriyo devaputto Bbagavantam anussaramauo

tayam velayam imam gatbam abbasi

'

Narao

te

buddba
'si

vir*

atlbu

vippamutto sambadbapatipanno 'smi tassa me saranam bbav&ti.'

sabbadbi

II

II

94

SURIYAPARITTA.

Atha kho Bhagava Suriyam devaputtam iirabbha asurindam guthiiya ajjhabhusi:

Tathiigatam arahantam Suriyo saranam gato "

Rahum

Rahu Suriyam pamuncassu Buddha lokinukampakati." ||2||

!

Yo andhakiire tamasi pabharikaro verocano mandall uggatejo ma Riihu gill caram antalikkbe
pajam

"

mama Rahu

pamufica Suriyan

ti."

||3||

Atha kho Riihu asurindo Suriyam devaputtam

*

pe

Sattadhii

me

phale

muddha
:

jivanto na sukham labhe

Buddhagiithabhigito 'mhi

no ce muficeyya Suriyan

ti.' ||4||

SURIYAPARITTAM.

Evam me
viharati

sutam.

Ekam eamayam Bhagava

ariime.
ti,

Siivatthiyam

Bhagava
te

Aniithapindikassa bhikkhii jiraantesi "bhikkhavo"

Jetavane

Tatra kho "bhadante" ti.

bhikkhu
:
||

Bhagavato

paccassosum.

Bhagava

etad

avoca "

II

Bhutapubbam,
ahosi.

bhikkhave,

devasura-sangiirao

samu-

pabbniho indo deve Tiivatimse iimantesi " Sace, mjiristi, deviinam sangamagatanam uppajjeyya bhayam vji chambhitattam vii lomahamso vii mam eva tasmim
:

Atha kho, bhikkhave, Sakko

devanam

samaye dhajaggam uUokeyyiitha. Mamara hi vo dhajaggam uUokayatam yam bhavissati bhayam vii chambhitattam va lomahamso vii so pahlyassati. ||2|| No ce me dhajaggam uUokeyyiitha, atha kho Pajiipatissa

dhajaggam uUokeyyiitha. Pajiipatissa hi fo devayam bhavissati bhayam ullokayatara riijassa dhajaggam 3 vii chambhitattam vii lomahamso vii so pahlyissati.
devariljassa
;
|| 1|

DHAJAOGA PARITTA.

95

ce Pujjipatissa devariijassa dhajaggain uUokeyyutha, Varunassa dhajaggam uUokeyyutha. devariijassa Varuuassa hi vo devariijassa dhajaggam uUokayatara yam bhavissati bhayara vii chambhitattam vii lomahamso vii so

No

atha

pahlyissati. ||4|| No ce Varunassa

dhajaggam ullokeyyiitha, Isadhajaggam ullokeyyiitha. nassa hi vo devariijassa dhajaggam uUokayatara yam bhavissati bhayam va chambhitattam va lomahamso va so
devariijassa

atha Isiiuassa

devarajassa

pahlyissati.

||5||

Tam kho
.

pana bhikkhave Sakkassa

: :

vii

devanam indassa

dhajaggam uUokayatam Pajiipatissa vii deviinara riijassa dhajaggam uUokayatam Varunassa vii devariijassa dhajaggam Isiiuassa vii devariijassa dhajaggam uUokauUokayatam yatam yam bhavissati bhayam va chambhitattam vii lomahamso vii so pahlyetha pi no pahlyetha. 6
: :
II 1|

Tam

kissa hetu ?

"Sakko, bhikkhave, deviinam indo avitariigo avitadoso avitamoho bhirucchambhi uttriisi phaliiyiti." 7 " Sace Ahafica kho bhikkhave evam vadami tumhakam, bhikkhave, arauiiagatiinam va rukkhamulagatanam vii suuna[|
jj

giiragatiinam

vii

lomahamso
Iti pi so

vii

mam

uppajjeyya bhayam vii chambhitattam eva tasmim samaye anussareyyiitha

:

vii

Bhagava araham samma-sambuddho

vijja-carana-

sampanno sugato lokavidu anuttaro purisadamma-sarathi sattha devamanussanam buddho Bhagavii ti. ||8||

Mamam
bhayam
vii

hi vo bhikkhave anussaratam yam bhavissati chambhitattam va lomahamso pahlyissati.

:

No ce mam anussareyyiitha atha dhammani anussareyyatha

Sviikkhiito Bhagavatii

dhammo sanditthiko akiiliko

opanayiko paccattam veditabbo vinnuhiti. bhikkhave anussaratam yam bhavissati bha3'am va chambhitattam
vii

ehipassiko Dhammam hi vo

lomahamso va

so pahlyissati.

||9||

No

ce

dhammam

anussareyyiitha atha sangham anussa-

reyyiitha.

Supatipanno Bhagavato savakasangho, ujupatipanno Bhagavato siivakasahgho, uiiyapatipanno Bhagavato siivakasahgho, siimlcipatipanno Bhagavato siivakasangho yadidam cattiiri purisayugiiui attha purisapuggalii esa sava;

96
:

DHAJAGGA TARITTA.

kasangho iihuneyyo pjihuneyyo dakkhineyyo anjalikaranlyo anuttaram punna-khettam lokass&ti. Sangham hi vo bhikkhave anussaratam yam bhavissati bhayani vii chambhitattam vii lomahamso va so pahlyissati. ||10||

Tarn kissa hetu

hi, TathcTgato vltariigo vitadoso

bhikkhave, araham samraasambuddho vltamoho abhlru acchatnbhi anutrasi

ophahlyiti. ||11||

Idam avoca Bhagavii idam vatvana Sugato athiparam

etad avoca sattha
:

"Aranfie rukkha

miilevii sunfiagarevji

bhikkhavo
si^'ii."
||

anussaretha sambuddham bhayaiu tumhiikam no

1|

"

No

ce

Buddham

atha
*'

dhammam

sareyyatha lokajettham narasabhara sareyyatha niyyanikain sudesitam." i|2||

:

No ce Dhammam sareyyatha niyyanikam sudesitam atha sangham sareyyatha punfiakkhettam anuttaram." 3

j|

1|

"

Evam

Buddham sarantanam
vii

dhammam

sanghanca
hessa-

bhikkhavo bhayatn va chambhitattam

titi>||4ii

lomahamso na

DHAJAGGA PARITTAM.

Evam me sutam

Ekam samayam

Bhagavii Riijagahe

Tena kho pana samaMahiikassapo pipphaliguhayam viharati, yena ayasma abadhiko dukkhito balhagihlno. Atha kho Bhagavii silyanviharati Veluvane Kalandakaniviipe.

hasaraayam patisaUiinii vutthito, yen' iiyasmii Mahiikassapo ten' upasahkami upasahkamitva pailuatte iisane nisTdi. Nisajja kho Bhagavii iiyasmantam Makiikassapam etad avoca " Kacci te Kassapa khamanlyam, kacci yapanlyam, kacci Patikkamo dukkhiivedanii patikkamanti no abhikkamanti.
:

'fiiinam pariniiya ti

no abhikkamo

"

ti.

MAnAKASSArABOJJHANGA.

97

*Na me, bhante, khamanlyam na yapanlyam balhii me dukkhitvedanii abhikkamanti no patikkamanti. Abhikkamo
no patikkarao ti. " Satt' ime, Kassapa, boj jhangii may:! saramJid-akkhJitiT bhiivitii bahullkata abhinnjiya sambodhaya nibbaniiya samvattanti.
'siinam pafinayati
1) Satisambojjharigo kho,

Kassapa,

maya saramad-akkhato
nibbiinaya

bhjlvito

baliullkato

abhinnaya

sambodhaya
pe

samvattati.
2)

Dhammavicayasambojjhango
pe
pe

nibbiinaya sam-

vattati.

3) Viriyasambojjharigo

4) Pitisarabojjhango
5)
6)

nibbaniiya samvattati. nibbiiniiya samvattati.

Passaddhisambojjhango
Samiidhisambojjhango

pe pe

nibbiiniiya samvattati.

nibbiiniiya samvattati.

7) TJpekhasambojjharigo nibbiiniiya samvattati. pe Ime kho Kassapa satta boj jhangii maya sammiidakkhiita

bhavita bahulikata abhiiiuaya sambodhiiya nibbiiniiya samvattanti ti.

*

Taggha, Bhagava, bojjhangii, taggha, Sugata, bojjhariga

ti.'

Idam avoca Bhagavii

attamano

iiyasmii

Mahiikassapo

Bhagavato bhiisitam abhinandi.

Yutthahi cayasmii Mahiikassapo tamhii iibiidha tatha pablno c&yasmato Mahiikassapassa so abiidho ahositi.

MAHAKASSAPATTHERABOJJHANGAM.

The Mahdmoggalldnaithera hojjhahgam and the Mahdeundatthera hojjhahgam agree with the preceding sutta in all but the name.

viharati Jetavane Aniithapindikassa iiriime.

Ekara samayam Bhagava Siivatthiyam Tena kho pana samayena iiyasmii Girimiinando iibiidhiko hoti dukkhito Atha kho iiyasmii Anando yena Bhagavii ten* biilhagihlno.
:

Evam me sutam

upasamkami upasamkamitvii Bhagavantam abhiviidetvti ekamantam nisldi ekamantam nisinno kho iiyasma Anando

Bhagavantam etad avoca

98

GIRIMANANDASUTTA.

Ayasma, bhante, Girimjinando abjidhiko dukkhito bajhagiSjidhu bhante Bhagava yen* ayasma Girimanando ten' upasaiikaraatu anukamparn upjiday&ti. tvam Ananda Girimiinandassa bhikkbuno Sace kho Thiinara kho sanfia bhaseyyasi. upasankamitvii dasa Girimiinandassa bhikkbuno dasa etam vijjati yam pan'
lano.
;

sanna
"

sutvii so abildho thiiaaso

patippassambheyya.
asubhasannii,

Katame dasa

sannii ?

Aniccasafina,

anattasanna,

adinavasanna,

pahanasanila, viragasannii, nirodhasanfiii, sabbaloke anabhirati sanna, sabbasahkhiiresu aniccasanna, anapanasati."

Katama ca Ananda aniccasaiii'ia ? " Idh' Ananda bhikkhu, arafinagato va rukkhamulagato

va sunnagjiragato
anicca,

Rfipam vinnanam aniccan nakkhandhesu aniccanupassi

aniccasanna.
||

patisancikkhati aniccara, vedanii anicca, sanna anicca, sahkharii

:

vii iti

ti.

Iti

imesu

paiicas' upiida-

viharati.

Ayam

vuccat'

Ananda

1|

Katama ca Ananda anattasanna ? Idh' Ananda pe patisancikkhati

Cakkhum

anatta,

rupam

anatta, sotara anatta, jivha anatta,

rasa anatta, kayo anatta, photthabba anatta, dhamraii anattii ti.

Iti

mano

anatta,

ime cbasu ajjhattika-bahiresu iiyatanesu anattanupassi

viharati.

Ayam

vuccat'

Ananda

anattasanna.

||2||

Katama ca Ananda asubhasannji? Idh* Ananda bhikkhu imam eva kiiyam uddham pjidatalii, adho kesamatthakii tacapariyantam puram nanappakiirassa asucino paccavekkhati. Atthi imasmim kjlye kesa pe matthalungan ti. (See
:

page 82).
Iti imasmim kaye asubh&nupassl Ananda asubhasanna. 3
i|

viharati.

Ayam

vuccat*

1|

Katama

ca

Ananda

adlnavasafiria ?

Idh'

Ananda

pe

patisancikkhati.

GIRIMANANDASUTTA.

99
iti

Bahu dukkho kho ayam

kiiyo,

bahu udlnavo
:

imasmim

kaje vividha iibadhji uppajjanti seyyathidain

sisarogo,

Cakkhurogo, sotarogo, ghiinarogo, jivhiirogo, kiiyarogo, kannarogo, mukharogo, dantarogo, kuso, siiso, piniiso, daho, jaro, kucchirogo, mucchu, pakkhandika, sulo,
visQcikii,

kuttham, gando, kiliiso, soso, apam;iro, daddu, kandu, kacchura-khasii, vitacchika, lohitara, pittam, madhu-

meho, amsa, pilaka, bhagandala, pitta-samutthana-abadha, semha-samutthana-abadha, vata-samutthana-abadha, sannipatikii-abadhii, utu-viparinamaja-abadha, visama-pariharajii-

abiidha, opaka-abadha, kammavipilka-abadha, sitam,

unbam,
vuccat'

jigbaccha, pipasa, uccaro, passiivo.

kiiye adinavanupassi vibarati. 4 adlaavasauua. Ananda,
Iti
|| 1|

imasmim

Ayam

Katama

ca

Ananda pabanasanna ? Idb' Ananda bbikkbu

pajabati,

uppannam kama-vitakkam nadbivaseti byantikaroti anabbavam gameti.

viuodeti

Uppannam byapildavitakkam
byantikaroti anabbavam gameti.

nadbivaseti pajabati vinodeti

Uppannam vihimsavitakkam
deti byantikaroti

nadbivaseti pajabati vino-

anabbavam gameti. Uppannam uppanne papake akusale dbamme nidbiviiseti pajabati vinodeti byantikaroti anabbavam gameti.

Ayam

vuccat*

Ananda

pabanasaniia.

||5||

Katama c' Ananda viragasanua ? Idb' Ananda bbikku pe patisancikkbati.

Etam. santam etam panltam yadidam sabbasankbarasamatbo sabbClpadbi patinissago tanbakkbayo virago nibba-

^an tL

Ayam

vuccat*

Ananda

viragasanna.

||6||

Katama ca Ananda nirodbasanna ? Idb* Ananda bbikkbu pe patisancikkbati Etam santam etam panltam yadidam sabbasankbiirasamatbo
:

8abb(^padbi patinissaggo tanbakkbayo nirodbo nibbanan Ayam vuccat' Ananda nirodbasanila. 7

|j 1|

ti.

100
Katamii
Idh*
c'

GIRIMANANDASUTTA.

Ananda sabbaloke anabhiratisafinii ? Ananda bhikkhu ye loke upayupiidana

cetaso

adhitthan&bhinivesdnusayil te pajahanto viramati na upadisauna, 8 yanto. Ayam vuccat' Ananda sabba loke anabhirati
1| 1|

Katama c' Ananda sabbasankharesu aniccasafifia ? Idh' Ananda bhikkhu sabbasankharesu atthiyati harayati jigucchati. Ayam vuccat' Ananda sabbasankharesu aniccasauua.
II

II

Ananda anjipiinasati ? Idh' Ananda bhikkhu arafinagato vu rukkhamiilagato va sunnagiiragato \a. nlsldati pallankam abhujitva ujum kayam
Katatnii
c'

panidhaya

pariraukkham

satim

upatthapetva so sate va

assasati sate passasati:

Digham va assasanto digham assasamiti pajiiniiti. Digham vji passanto digham passasiimiti pajanati. Rassam va assasanto rassam assasamiti pajanati.
Rassam va passasanto
rassain passasiimiti pajanati.
assasissiimiti sikkhati.

Sabbakayam patisamvedl Sabbakayam patisamvedl

passasissainiti sikkhati.
assasissiimiti sikkhati.

Passambhayam kayasankharam Passambhayam kayasankharam

passasissamiti sikkhati.

Piti-patisamvedl assasissiimiti sikkhati.

Piti-patisamvedl passasissiimiti sikkhati.

Sukha- patisamvedl

assasissiimiti sikkhati.

Sukha-patisamvedl passasissiimiti sikkhati.

Citta-sahkhiira-patisamvedi assasissiimiti sikkhati.

Gitta-sahkhiira-patisamvedl passasissiimiti sikkhati.

Passambhayam cittasahkhiiram Passambhayam cittasankhiiram

assasissiimiti sikkhati.

passasissiimiti sikkhati.

Citta-patisaravedl assasissamiti sikkhati.

Oitta-patisamvedl passasissiimiti sikkhati.

Abhippamodayam cittam Abhippamodayam cittam

assasissiimiti sikkhati.

passasissiimiti sikkhati.

ATANATIYASUTTA.
Samjidayam cittam assasissiimiti sikkhati. Saniadayam cittam passasissamiti sikkhati.

101

Vimocayam

cittam assasissiimiti sikkhati.

Viraocayam cittam passasissamiti sikkhati.

AniccanupassT assasissiimiti sikkhati.

AniccanupassI passasissiimiti sikkhati.

ViriiganupassI assasissiimiti sikkhati. ViriiganupassI passasissiimiti sikkhati.

Nirodhanupassi assasissiimiti sikkhati. NirodhanupassI passasissamiti sikkhati.

PatinissagganupassT assasissamiti sikkhati.
PatinissagganupassI passasissiimiti sikkhati.

Ayam
dasa

vuccat'

Ananda

aniipiiniisati. ||10|j

Sace kho tvam

saiiuii

Ananda Girimiinandassa bhikkhum

imii

Atha

sutva so abadho thanaso patippassambheyyati. kho ayasma Anando Bhagavato santike imii dasa
:

yen' ayasmii Girimanando ten' upasankami upasankamitvii ayasmato Girimanandassa ima dasa sauna
sarina uggahetvii
abhiisi.

Atha kho iiyasmato Girimiinadassa

so abiidho thanaso patippassambhi.

imii dasa sanfiii sutva

Vutthahi

cayasraii

Girimanando

tamhii

iibiidhii

tatha

pahino ca panayasmato Girimanandassa so iibiidho ahositi.

GIRIMANANDASUTTAM.

NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMASAMBUDDHASSA.

Evam me sutam
viharati Gijjhakiite
:

Ekam samayam
pabbate.

Bhagavii Riijagahe
cattiiro mahiiriijii

Atha kho

mahatiyii ca Yakkha-seniiya mahatiyii ca Gandhabba-seniiya mahatiya ca Kumbhanda-seniiya mahatiyii ca Niiga-seniiya

catuddisam rakkham thapetvii catuddisam gumbarn thapetvii catuddisam avaranam thapetvii abhikkantiiya rattiyii abhik-

102

ATANATIYASUTTA.
:

kautavannii kevalakappam

Gijjhakutam obhasetva yena upasankamimsu upasankamitva Bhagavantam abhiviidetvii ekamantam nisldimsu. 1 Te pi kho Yakkha app' ekacce Bhagavantam abhivadetva ekamantam nisldimsu app' ekacce yena Bhagavata saddhim sammodimsu saramodanlyara katham saranlyam vltisaretva ekamantam nisldimsu; app' ekacce yena Bhagava ten' anjalim panametva ekamantam nisldimsu app' ekacce niima gottam savetva ekamantam nisldimsu app' ekacce tunhlbhuta eka-

Bhagava

ten'

fj

1|

mantam nisldimsu. ||2|| Ekamantam nisinno kho Vessavanno maharaja Bhagavantam etad avoca
Santi
hi,
:

bhante, ujarji Yakkhji Bhagavato appasanna:

uliinT

santi hi, bhante,

hi,

bhante, majjhima

Yakkha Bhagavato pasannii santi Yakkha appasanna santi hi, bhante,

:
:

majjhima Yakkha pasanna: Bhagavato appasanna: santi

gavato pasanna.
||3||

santi hi, bhante, nica Yakkhji

hi,

bhante, nIca

Yakkha Bha-

Yebhuyyena kho pana bhante Yakkha appasanna yeva Bhagavato tam kissa hetu ? "Bhagava hi, bhante, piinatipata veramaniya dhamraam deseti adinntidana veramaniya dhammam deseti kamesu micchacara veramaniya dhammam deseti musavada veramaniya dhamraam deseti suramerayamajja-pamadatthanii
;
; ;
;

veramaniya

dhammam

deseti."

||

1|

"Yebhuyyena kho pana, bhante, Yakkha appativirata yeva adinnudanii, appativirata kamesu panatipiitii, appativirata
micchaciira,

appativirata

musavjidii,

appativirata

sura-

merayamajjapamadatthana, tesam tam hoti appiyam amanapam."||5||^ "Santi hi bhante Bhagavato savakii arafiue vanapanthani
panthani
seniisanjini patisevanti

appasaddani appanigghosani
:

vijanavatani manussa-rahaseyyakani patisallana-siiruppani Tattha santi uliira Yakkha niviisino, ye imasmim Bhagavato

pavacane appasanna. Tesam pasiidaya ugganhjitu, bhante, Bhagava Atanatiyam rakkham bhikkhunarn, bhikkhunlnam,

upasakanam

phasuviharay^ti."

upjisikanam guttiyii rakkhjiya avihirasaya Adhivasesi Bhagava tunhlbhavena. Atha

ATANATIYASUTTA.

103

kho Yessavano
tayam veliiyam

raahjirajii

Bhagavato adhiviisanara viditva

:

imam

Atiinatiyam rakkham abhasi

||6||

Yipassissa nam' atthu cakkhumantassa sirlmato ! Sikkhissa pi nam' atthu sabba-bhutanukampino

!

||1||

Yessabhussa nam' atthu nahjitakassa tapassino Nam' atthu Kakusandhassa Milra-sena-pamaddino

||2||

Koniigamanassa nam* atthu brahmanassa vuslmato 3 Kassapassa nam' atthu vippamuttassa sabbadhe
!
||

1|

Anglrasassa nam' atthu Sakyaputtassa sirlmato

Yo imam dhammam adesesi sabba-dukkha pan udunam!

Ye
capi nibbuta loke yathabhutara vipassisum

||4||

Te jana apisuna ca mahanta vitasarada Hitam devamanussanam yam naraassanti Gotamam Yijjiicarana-sampannam mahantam vltasaradam. i|5||
Yato uggacchati suriyo adicco mandali mahai, Yassa c'uggacchamanassa samvarl pi nirujjhati, Yassa c'uggate suriye divaso ti pavuccati. ||6||

Rahado

pi tattha

Evara tarn tattha

gambhiro samuddo saritodako jiinanti samuddo saritodako

iti

Ito sa purimii disa

nam

acikkhati jano.

||7||

Yam

disara abhipaleti mahjiraja yassasi so

adhipiiti

Gandhabbiinam

Dhatarattho

iti

namaso
||

E-amati naccagltehi Gandhabbehi purakkhato.

1|

Putta pi tassa bahavo eka nama ti me sutam Asltim dasa eko ca Indanama mahabbala. 9
||

1|

Te ca

pi

Buddham

Durato va

disviina Buddham iidiccabandhunara naraassanti mahantam vltasaradam. ||10||

!

Namo

te puris&janfia

namo

te puris'

uttama

Kusalena samekkhesi amanussil pi tam vandanti Sutam n'etam abhinhaso tasma evara vademase.

II

1111

Jinam vandatha Gotamam

jinara vandjima

Gotamam,
||12j|

Yijjacaranasampannara Buddham vandiima Gotamam! Yena Pefa pavuccanti pisunii pitthiraamsika

Fanatipiitino ludda cora nekatika jana.
II

13

1|

104'
Ito
sii

AT4NATIYASUTTA.
dukkhinJI
disa. iti

nam

iicikkhati jano

Yam

disam

abhipilleti inaliiiraja yasasslso

KurabhandJinam adhipati Virulho iti niima so Ramati naccagltehi Kurabhandehi pur' akkhuto.
Putta pi tassa bahavo eka nama ti me sutain Asltim dasa eko ca Indanamit mahabbala 15
||

II

14

1|

|j

Te ca pi Buddhara disvana Buddhara iidicca baiidhunam Durato va namassanti mahantam vltasaradam. ||16||

Namo te purisajanna namo te puris' uttama Kusalena samekkhasi amanussii pi tarn vandanti Sutain n' etam abhinhaso tasma evam vandemase.
! !

||

17

1|

Jinam vandatha Gotamam, jinam vandama Gotamam, 18 Vijjiicaranasampannam Buddham vandama Gotamam
!
II

Yatha
Yassa

c' c'

uggacchati suriyo adicco mandall

maha

uggaccbamanassa divaso pi nirujjhati Yassa coggate suriye samvariti pavuccati

Kahado

Evam

pi tattha gambhiro samuddo saritodako tarn tattha jananti samuddo saritodako. 19

||

1|

Ito sa pacchimji

Yam

disam

iicikkhati jano abhipiileti mahjinlja yasassi so

disii iti

nam

Nagiinam ca adhipati Viriipakkho iti niimaso Kamati naccagltehi Nagehi pur^kkhato. \\20\\
Puttii pi tassa

bahavo eka nama

ti

me sutam
I|21||

Asltim dasa eko ca Indauilma mahabbala.

Te

c&pi Buddham disvana Buddham adiccabandhunam Diirato va namassanti mahantam vitasilradam. 22

|| 1|

Namo

te purisajanna,

namo

te puris*

uttama

Kusalena samekkhasi amanussii pi tarn vandanti

Sutam n'etam abhinhaso

tasmii
!

evam vandemase

II23II

jinam vandiima Gotamam Buddham vandiima Gotamam Vijjiicaranasampannam Yena Uttara-kururammii Mahilmeril Sudassano

Jinam vandatha Gotamam

Manussii tattha jiiyanti amamii apariggahii.

||24||

ATANATIYASUTTA.
IsTa te

105

bljarn pavapanti

na pi nlyanti nangala
paribhunjanti manussa.
I|25||

Akattha-pakimam

siilim

Akanam athusam suddham sugandham tandulapphalam

Tundlklre pacitvana tato bhunjanti bhojanam.
I|26||

Gavim ekakhuram katvii anuyanti diso disam Pasum ekakhuram katva anuyanti diso disam Itthi va vahanam katva anuyanti diso disam
Purisavahanam katva anuyanti diso disam

Kumarlvahanam katva anuyanti disa disam Kumaravahanam katva anuyanti diso disam.

II

27

II

Te yane abhiruhitva sabbadisa anupariyanti pacara

rajino

tassa

Hatthi-yiinam assa-ytinam dibba-yanam upattbitam Pasada sivika c' eva maharajassa yassasi so
Tassa ca nagarH ahu antalikkhe sumapita Atanata Kusinata Parakusinata Natapuriya ParakusitaniitS.
II

28

II

Uttarena Kuplvanto Janogbam aparena ca

Navanavatiyo
rajadhanl.

Ambara-ambaravatiyo Alakamanda nama

||29|i

Kuverassa kho pana, marisa, mabarajassa Yisana nama

rajadhanl

Tasma Kuvero maharaja Yessavano

ti

pavuccati.

|j30||

Paccessanto pakasenti Tatola Tattala Tatotala Ojasi Tejasi Tatojasi Saroriija Arittho Nemi

Rahado

pi tattha DharanI niima yato megha pavassanti Vassa yato patayanti sabbapi tattha Bhagalavati nama Yattha Yakkha payirupasanti. ||31
1|

Tattha niccaphahT rukkha namii dijaganayuta Mayura-koucabhi ruda-kokiladlhi vaggubhi Jivara-jlvaka sadd' ettha, atho otthava-cittaka

Kukutthaka

kullrakii

vane pokkharasataka.

||

32

1|

Sukasalika-sadd' ettha, dandamanavakiini ca Sobhati sabbakalam sa Kuvera-nalini sada. 113311

106
Ito sa uttam disa

ATANATIYASUTTA.
iti

nam

acikkhati jano,

Yam

disam abhipaleti mahiiraja yasassi so

1134
II

Yakkhiinam adhipati Kuvero iti niimaso Kamati nacca-gltehi Yakkhehi pur' akkhato.

Putta pi tassa bahavo eka niima ti me sutam Asltim dasa eko ca Inda nama mahabbula. ||35||

Te

capi

Buddham

disvana

Buddham

ildicca

bandhunam
||36||

Durato va namassanti mahantam vitasaradam.

Namo

te puris' ajafiua,

namo
:

te puris'

uttama 37
!

Kusalena saraekkhasi amanussa pi tarn vandanti Sutam n* etam abhinhaso tasma evam yandemase
!

||

Jinam vandatba Gotamam Jinam vandama Gotamam Vijjacarana-sampannam Buddhain vandama Gotamam!

Ayaln klio sii, marisa, Atanatiya rakkha, bhikkhunam bhikkhunlnam upasakanam upasikanam guttiya, rakkhaya,
avihirasaya, phiisu viharjiya
ti.
II

II

bhikkhussa va bhikkhuniya va Tipjisakassa va upasikiiya v& ayam Atanatiya rakkha suggabita bhavissati samatta pariyaputii tance amanusso Yakkho va

Yassa

kassaci,

marisa,

Yakkhinl va Yakkhapotako va Yakkhapotika va Yakkhamahamatto va Yakkhaparisajjo va Yakkhapacaro va 8 9 Gandhabbo va GandhabbI vil pe Kumbhando va Kumbhandl va IIIOU pe 11 vii va Nago pe Naglnl gacchantam va anugaccheyya thitam va paduttheicitto va upanisldeyya, nipannam va upatittheyya, nisinnam
II II II II II II

upanipajjeyya.

II

12

II

amanusso labheyya giimesu va nigamesu va sakkarara va garukaram va. Nam eso, marisa, amanusso labheyya Alakamandaya rajadhaniya vatthum va vasam va. Nam eso, marisa, amanusso labheyya Yakkhanam samitim
eso, marisa,

Nam

gantum.

II

1311

nam, marisa, amanussa anavayham pi nam Api kareyyum avivayham. Api ssu nam, marisa^ amanussa attahi
88U

ATANATiyASUTTA.
pi paripunnahi paribhasiihi paribhaseyyura.
miirisa,

107

Api

ssu

nam,

amanussa

rittum

pi

pattam

sise

nikkujjeyyum

Api

ssu

nam, marisa, amanussa sattadha pi assa muddham

phiileyyum. ||14|| Santi hi, marisa, amanussa, candii, rudda, rabhasa, te n' eva

maharajanara adiyanti na maharajanam purisakanam adiyanti na maharajanam purisakanarn purisakanam adiyanti. Te kho te, marisa, amanussa maharajanam avaruddha nama
; ;

vuccanti, seyyathiipi marisa, ||15|| "raiino Magadhassa vijite cora te n' eva ranno
:

Magadhassa Magadhassa purisakanam adiyanti na raiino Magadhassa purisakanam adiyanti. Te kho te, marisa, mahacora pi ranno Magadhassa avaruddha nama vuccanti. Evam eva kho, marisa, santi hi amanussa canda, rudda, rabhasa te n' eva maharajanam adiyanti na maharajanam, purisakanam adiyanti, na maharajanam purisakanam adiTe kho 'te, marisa, amanussa avaruddha nama yanti.
adiyanti
;

na

railiio

vuccanti.

||16||

Yo

hi

koci, marisa,

amanusso Takkho va TakkhinI

pe pe 20
1|

pe-||17||

Gandhabbo va Gandhabbi Kumbhando va Kumbhandl

||

18

1|

||19||

Nago va Naglnl va
padutthacitto

pe

||

bhikkhum va bhikkhunim va upasakam va

upasikanam va gacchantam va anugaccheyya, thitam va upatittheyj'a, nisinnam va upanisldeyya, nipannam va upanipajjeyya, imesam Yakkhanam Mahiiyakkhanam senapatlnam
mahasenapatlnam upajjhapetabbam vikkanditabbam viravitabbam: ||21||

Ayam Yakkho
Yakkho
vihimsati,
hetheti,

ayam Yakkho avisati, ayam Yakkho himsati, ayam Yakkho ayam Yakkho na 22 muficatiti. ayam
ganhati,
||

1|

Katamesara Yakkhanam Mahayakkhanam sena-patinam,

maha-seua-patlnam
?

Indo Somo Varuno ca Bharadvajo

Pajjipati

Cando Karaascttho ca Kinnughandu Nighandu ca Panado Opamauuo ca Devasuto ca Matali

108
Cittaseno ca

ATAXATIYASUTTA.

Oandhabbo Nalarujii Janesabho Ilemavato Punnako Karatiyo Gulo Sivako Mucalindo ca Vessaraitto Yugandharo
Siitsigiro

Gopjilo

Suppagedho ca

Ilirl

NettI ca Mandiyo

Pancalacando Alavako Pajjuno Sumano Sumukho

Dadhimukho Mani
saha.
II

Miiaicaro

Digho Atho Serissako

23

II

Imesam YakkhJinam mahiiyakkhanam senapatlnam

mahii-

senapatlnam ujjhapetabbam vikkanditabbam viravitabbara na rauncatiti. ||24|| Ayam Yakkho ganhiiti pe kho sii, marisa, AtiinJitiyii rakkhii bhikkhunara Ayam bhikkhunlnain upasakanam upasikiinara guttiya rakkhaya
avihimstiya phiisuviharayjiti.
II

25

II

Handa ca'
Yassa

diini

mayam

marisa gaccbiima bahukicca

mayam

bahukaranlyati.
diini

||26||

Atha kho
abhivadetva
yimsu.
I|28||

tumhe maharjijjino killara maririathElti. II27II cattaro mahiirajaao utthayslsana, Bhagavantam

padakkhinam
katva
tatth'

ev'

antaradha-

Te

pi

kho Yakkha

utthjiyasanji

app ekacce Bhagavantam

abhivadetva padakkhinam katvii tatth' ev' antaradhayiinsu. App* ekacce Bhagavata saddhira sammodimsu sammodani-

yam katham

sariinlyara vltisiiretvii tath ev' antaradhayiinsu. ekacce App' yena Bhagava, ten' aftjalim panametvii tatth'

ev' antaradhiiyimsu.

App' ekacce nilma gottain App' ekacce tunhlbhOta

"

siivetvii tatth* ev'

antaradhayiinsu.
j|

tatth' ev' antaradhayimsQti. 1129

rakkham PariyaDharetha, bhipunatha, bhikkhave Atiinatiyam rakkham

TJgganhJItha, bhikkhave, AtanJitiyam
!
!

kkhave, Atanatiyam rakkhain ! Atthasamhitiiya, bhikkhave, Atanatiya rakkha bhikkhunam bhikkhunlnain upasakanam
upasikiinam guttiya rakkhaya avihimsaya phasu vilijirjiyati. Idam avoca Bhagava attamana te bhikkhu Bhagavato
:

bhasitam abhinandun

ti.

II

30

II

ATANATIYASUTTAM.

DHAMMACAKKA.

109

NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMASAMBUDDHASSA.

Evam me sutam
viharati
:

Ekam

saraayara Bhagavii Baranasiyam

Isipatane Migadaye. vaggiye bhikkhu iimantese: 1

||

Tatra kho Bhagava panca1|

"Dve

'me,

bhikkhave, anta

pabbajitena na

sevitabbiii.

Katarae dve?

*Yo c^yam kjimesu kiimasukhallikanuyogo hino gammo pothujjaniko anariyo anatthasamhito yocayam atta-kilama;

th&nuyogodukkhoanariyoanatthasamhito;

etekhobhikkhave

ubho ante anupagamma majjhima

fiuiiya

patipadii Tathagatena abhisarabuddha cakkhukarani nanakarani upasamaya abhi-

sambodhaya nibbanaya

samvattati.'

||2

1|

Katamii ca sa bhikkhave majjhima patipada Tathagatena abhisambuddha cakkhukarani nanakarani upasamaya abhinniiya "

sambodhaya nibbanaya samvattati ? Ayam eva ariyo atthangiko maggo, seyyathidam Sammaditthi, saramasankappo, sammaviica, sammiikammanto,
:

Bammiiajlvo sammiivayamo, sammilsati, sammiisamadhi. ||3|| Ayam kho sii, bhikkhave, majjhima patipada Tathagatena abhisambuddhji cakkhukarani nanakarani upasamaya abhifi-

naya sambodhaya nibbanaya samvattati.

||3||

Idam kho

pana, bhikkhave, dukkhara ariyasaccam

jati pi

dukkhii, jara pi dukkha, vyadhi pi dukkha,

maranam

pi

dukkham, appiyehi sampayogo dukkho, piyehi vippayogo dukkho, yam pi icchara na labhati tam pi dukkham
sankhittena pane' upiidanakkhandha dukkha.
||4||

Idam kho

pana,

bhikkhave,

dukkhasamudayam

ariya-

saccam: yjiyam tanhaponobbhavikii nandi-riiga-sahagata tatra tatrabhinandini, seyyathidam Kamatanha,bhavatanha, vibha:

vatanha.

||5||

Idam kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhanirodham ariyasaccam, yo tassa yeva tanhaya asesa-viriiga-nirodho cago patinissago
mutti analayo.
||t>||

110

DHAMMACAKKA.
pana, bhikkhave, dukkhanirodhagilminl pati-

Idam kho

pada ariyasaccam.

Ayam
ditthi

eva ariyo atthangiko

maggo
||

seyyathidam samraa-

Idam
pubbe

pe dukkhara

sammiisaraadhi.

II

ariyasaccan

ananussutesu
udapiidi,
i|8||

dhamraesu
udapadi,

ti me, bhikkhave, cakkhura udapiidi, ilii-

nam

pafinu

vijjii

udapadi,

aloko

udapadi.

pan' idam dukkham ariyasaccam parifiiieyan ti bhikkhave, pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu pe parinnutan ti me, bhikkhave, pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu cakkhum udapiidi, niinam udapiidi, panfla udapiidi, vijja

Tam kho

me,

udapiidi, aloko udapiidi.

||9||

Idam dukkhasamudayara ariyasaccam

pe
aloko udapiidi.
ti

ti

me, bhikkhave,
ariyasaccam
ti

||10||

Tam kho
pahiitabban

pan' idam

dukkhasamudayara
pe

me bhikkhave

pahlnan
ti

me

bhi-

kkhave
pe

pe

iiloko udapiidi. ||11||

Idam dukkhanirodham ariyasaccam

iiloko udapiidi.
||

me bhikkhave

12

1|

Tam kho
katabban
kkhave,
bhikkhave,
ti

me

pan' idam dukkhanirodham ariyasaccam sacchila sacchikatan ti me, bhibhikkhave,

iiloko udapiidi.
||

pe

13

1|

Idam dukkhanirodhagiimini
pe

patipadii ariyasaccan
||

ti

me,

iiloko udapiidi.

14

1|

pan' idam dukkhanirodhagiimini patipadii ti me, bhikkhave, bhavetabban bhiivitan pe ariyasaccan iiloko ti me, bhikkhave, pe udapiidi. ||15|| Yiiva klvafica me, bhikkhave, iraesu catusu ariyasaccesu

Tam

kho

evam

ti-parivattara dviidasii-kiiram yathiibhutam niinadassa-

nam na suvisuddham

ahosi

n'eva

tavaham

bhikkhave

sadevake loke samiirake sabrahmake, sassamanabriihmaniyii pajiiya sadevamanussiiya anuttaram sammiisambodhim abhi-

sambuddho paccafifiilsim. ||16|| Yato ca kho me, bhikkhave, imesu catusu ariyasaccesu evam tiparivattara dviidasiikiiram yathiibhiitara fiiinadassanam
suvisuddham ahosi, athaham, bhikkhave, sadevake loke samarake sabrahmake sassamanabrahmanlyii pajiiya sadevama-

DHAMMACAKKA.
nussiiya

HI
ti

anuttaram
111711

sammusambodhim abhisambuddbo
*
:

paccannasim.
ceto-vimutti,
ti/
II

Nanauca pana
18
II

me dassanam
jati,

ayam antimu
:

adapadi Akuppa me n'atthi dani punabbhavo

Idam avoca Bhagava

attamana pancavaggiya bhikkbu

||

Bhagavato bhasitam abhinandanti.

19

1|

Imasmim ca pana veyyakaranasmim bbanfiamane Kondannassa virajam vltaraalam dhammacakkhum

*

ayasraato
udapildi
:

Yam

kinci

samudaya-dhammam sabbam
||20||

tarn

nirodha-

dhamraanti.'

dhammacakke Bbumma deva * anussavesum Evam saddam Bhagavata Biiranasiyam Isipatane Migadaye anuttaram dhammacakkam pavattitam,
Pavattite ca pana Bhagavata
:

appativattiyam samanena va brahmanena va devena Marena va Brahmuna va kenaci lokasmin ti.' I|21||

va

Bhummanam devanam saddam sutva Catumaharajika deva saddam anussavesum ||22 pe devanam saddam sutva, Tavatimsa Catumaharajikanam deva saddam anussavesum ||23|| pe
.
1|

Yam a

deva

pe pe

||24|| ||25|j
.

TusitJi devji

Nimmanarati deva

||26|| pe Paranimmitavasavattino deva pe

||27||

Brahmaparisajja deva Brahmapurohita deva

Mahiibrahraa deva
Parittabha deva

pe pe
pe
.
||

||28||

||29|j
1|

30
|j

pe pe
.

||

31
.

Appamanabha deva
Abhassara deva
Parittasubha deva

pe
||

||32li
1|

33
.

||34|| pe deva 35 Appamanasubha pe Subhakinnii deva I|36|| pe

.
||

li

Vehapphala deva Asannasatta deva

Avihti deva

pe
.

||

pe pe pe

pe 39
||

||

37 38

II

1|

1|

Attappa deva Sudaasa deva

||40|(

||41

1|

112
SudassT devil
Akanitthii deva

MAIIASAMAYASUTTA.
pe pe
.

||42||
.

||43||

Evam Bhagavata

Biiranasiyam Isipatane Migadiiye anutta-

ram dhammacakkam pavattitam appativattiyam samanena vii brjihraanena vji devena va Marena vii Brahmunii vii kenaci
vii

lokasmin
Iti

ti.

||

44

1|

ha tena khanena tena layena tena rauhuttena yiiva Brahmalokii saddo abbhuggafichi, ayanca kho dasasahassilokadhiitu sahkampi, sarapakarapi, sampavedhi appainiino ca uliiro obhiiso loke piiturahosi atikkamma deviinam devanu;

bbiivan

ti.

||45||
:

Atha kho Bhagavii udiinam udiinesi "Anniisi vata bho Kondafino, afifiiisi vata bho Kondanno ti." ||46||
Iti hi'

dara iiyasmato Kondanfiassa Aiiniitakondarifio tv eva

namam

ahosi. ||47i|

DHAMMACAKKAM.

NAMO TASSA BHAGAYATO ARAHATO SAMMASAMBUDDHASSA.

Evam me
viharati

sutam

Ekam samayam Bhagava

mahiivane
mahatii

Sakkesu

bhikkhuKapilavatthusmim sabbeh' eva bhikkhusatehi saddhira paficamattehi sarighena arahantehi dasahi ca lokadhiitiihi devatii yebhuyyeua sanni1 patita honti, Bhagavantam dassaniiya bhikkhusanghanca.
||

1|

Atha kho catunnam Suddh&viisa-kiiyikauam devanam etad

ahosi
:

Ayarn kho Bhagavii Sakkesu viharati Kapilavatthusmim mahiivane mahatii bhikkhu-sanghena saddhim paficamattehi
bhikkhusatehi sabbeh' eva arahantehi, dasahi ca lokadhiitiihi
devatii

"

yebhuyyena
ten'

sannipatitii honti,

Bhagavantam

dassa-

naya bhikkhu-sanghafica.
gavii

yena Bhaupasasankameyyiima, upasankamitvii Bhagavato

niina

Yan

mayam
||

pi

santike paccekam giitham bhiiseyyiimati."

1|

Atha

kho

tii

devata

seyyathiipi niima balavii

puriso

MAHASAMAYASUTTA.

113

samminjitam va baham pasareyya pasaritara va baham samminjeyya evam evam kho Suddhslvasesu devesu antarahita Bhagavato purato paturahamsu. ||3|| Atha kho ta devatii Bhagavantam abhivadetvji ekamantam attharasu ekamantam thitii kho eka devatii Bhaga:

vato santike

imam gatham
"

abhasi

Mahasaraayo pavanasmim deva-kaya samagata AgatamhcT imam dhammasamayam

!

dakkhitaye aparajitasanghan"

ti.

||

1|

Atha kho apara devata Bhagavato santike imam gatham

abhasi
:

" Tatra bhikkhavo samadahamsu

cittam attano ujukam akamsu
Sarathi va nettiini gahetva " indriyani rakkhanti pandita
ti. ||2||

Atha kho apara devata Bhagavato

abhasi
:

santike

imam gatham

" Chetva khilam chetva paligham indakhllam uhaccam aneja

Te caranti suddha vimala cakkhumata sudanta susunag^"

abhasi

ti. ||3||

Atha kho apara devata Bhagavato santike imam giitham

:

"

Ye
na

keci buddhara saranam gatase

te gamissanti

apayam deham manusam Pahaya

devakayam paripuressanti

"
ti.
||

1|

Atha kho Bhagavii bhikkhu amantesi

"
sannipatita

Yebhuyyena, bhikkhave, dasasu lokadhjitusu devata Tathagatam dassanaya bhikkhu sahghanca. Ye pi te, bhikkhave, ahesum atitain addhanam arahanto sammasambuddha, tesara pi Bhagavantiinam ete paramii yeva devata Ye pi to, sannipatita ahesum, seyyatha pi mayham etarahi.
bhikkhave, bhavissanti aniigatara addhanam arahanto sammasambuddha, tesam pi Bhagavantanam ete parama yeva
8

114

MAHASAMAYASUTTA.

devata sannipatita bbavissanti, seyyatha pi rahi." 5

II
II

mayham

eta-

"

AcikkhissJimi, bhikkhave

devakJiyJinara

niimani, kitta-

ylssami, bhikkhave, devakayjinam niimani, desissiitni, bhiTarn suniitha, sildhukam kkhave, dcvakayjinam niimani.

manasikarotha
sum.
**

bhiisissjimiti. ||6||

" Evara bhante

"
!

ti.

Te bhikkhn Bhagavato paccasso||7||

BhagavcT etad avoca:

Silokam anukassiimi, yathii bhummii tad

assita

Ye

sitii

girfgabbharam pahitattti samahitii

va
salllnii

Puthu

sihii

lomaharasabhisambhuno
vane Kiipilavatthave.
:

Odiita manasti saddhil vippassanara aniivila

Bhiyo pauca-sate
Tato iimantayi

iiatvii

Ill

||

satthii siivake siisane rate

Devakiiyii abhikkantii te vijaniitha bhikkhave ? Te ea atappam akarum sutvii Buddhassa siisanam

Tesam

piitur

ahu nanam amanussilna dassanam.

||2||

App' eke satam addakkhum sahassam atha sattati Satam eke sahassiinain araanussiinam addarasu App eke 'nantam adakkhum disii sabba phutii ahu Tafica sabbam abhinfiiiya pavakkhitviina cakkhumii
Tato amantayi
satthii siivake siisane rate
:

Devakiiyii abhikkantii te vijiiniitha bhikkhave ?

Ye

vo 'ham kittayissiimi

giriihi

anupubbaso.

||

1|

Sattasahassii

Yakkhii ea bhummii Kiipilavatthavii

va-

Iddhimanto jutimanto vannavanto yasassino Modamiinii abhikkiimum bhikkhunam samitim

nam.

||4||

Cha sahassii Hemavatii Yakkhii niinatta-vannino Iddhimanto jutimanto vannavanto yasassino Modamiinii abhikkamum bhikkhunam samitim
naro.
1)5
1|

va-

Satagirii ti-sahassil

Yakkhii

pe
pe

||6||

Ice ete solasa sahassa Yakkhii

Vessamittil paflca
satii

||7||

Yakkhii

po

||

II

MAHASAMAYASUTTA. Kumbhiro Riijagahiko Vepullassa nivesanam,

Bhiyo nam satasahassam Yakkliunara payirupasati, Kumbhiro Rajagahiko so p' iiga samitim vanara. ||9||
Puriraaiica disam
riijii

Hg

Dhatarattho tam

pasiisati

Gandhabbiinarn adhipati mahariijii yasassi so. Puttii pi tassa bahavo indanama mahabbala

Iddhimanto jutimanto vannavanto yasassino Modamana abhikkamum bhikkhunam samitim

va-

nam. moil

Dakkhinanca disam raja Virulho tam pasiisati Kumbhandanam adhipati maharaja yasassi so
Putta pi tassa

pe

II

11

II

Pacchimanca disam raja VirOpakkho tam

Niigiinauca adhipati mahiiriijii yasassi
so.

pasiisati

Putta pi tassa
Uttarafica disam

pe

II

12

1|

riija Kuvero tam pasiisati Yakkhanain adhipati mahariija yasassi so

Putta pi tassa

pe

||

13

il

Purimam disam

Dhatarattho, dakkhinena Virulhako Pacchimena Virupakkho, Kuvero uttaram disam Cattaro te maharaja samantii caturo disa Daddallamana attharasu vane Kiipilavatthave. I|14||

Tesam mayiivino dasii agu vancanika sathii Maya Kutendu Vetendu Vitucca Yitucco saha Candano Kamasettho ca Kinnughandu Nighandu ca
Paniido Opamanrio ca devasuto ca Miitali Citta-Seno ca Gandhabbo Nalaraja Janesabho Agum Pancasikho ceva Timbaru Suriyavaccasa

Ete c' aiine ca riijiino Gandhabbii saha riijubhi ModamiiDa abhikkiimum bhikkhunam samitim nam. II15II

va-

Ath^gu

Niibhasii

Naga Yesala

saha Tacchaka

Kambalassatara iigu Payiigii saha niitibhi, Yilmunii Dharattha ca iigu Niigii yasassino
Eriivano Mahauilgo so p' iigu samitim vanam.
II

16

j|

116

MAHASAMAYASUTTA.

Ye nagaraje sahasa haranti dibba dvijii pakkhi visuddhacakkhu

vehasaya
Citta
te vana-majjlia-pattii

Supanna iti tesam naraam abhayam tadii Nagarajanam asi Supannato khemara akasi Buddho Sanhiihi viicJihi upavhayanta NagcT Supanna saranam againsu Buddham.
Jita vajira-hatthena samuddara asiira sita. Bhataro Vasavas* ete iddhimanto yasassino.

||171l

Kiilakanja mahahimsa asura Danaveghasa Vepacitti Sucitti ca Paharado Namuci saha

Satafica Baliputtanam sabbe

verocanamaka
va-

Sannayhitva balim senam

Samayo
nam.

dani,
||18|(

Rahubhaddam upagaraum bhadante, bhikkhunam samitim

Apo

ca deva Pathavl Tejo Yayo tad agamum Varuna Varuna deva Somo ca Yasasii saha

Mettakaruna-kayika agu deva yasassino

Das' ete dasadhakayii sabbe nanatta-vannino Idhiraanto samitim vanam 19 pe
II

II

Venhu

ca deva Sahall ca

Asama

ca duve

Yama

Candass* upanissii deva candam agu purakkhatvii

Suriyass* upanissa deva suriyam agu purakkhatva Nakkhattani purakkhatva ilgu mandavalahaka Vasunam Yasavo settho Sakko p' iigu Purindado

Das' ete dasadbakaya sabbe nanatta-vannino Iddhimanto samitim vanam. 20 pe

II

II

Ath' iigu Sahabhu deva jalam aggi sikhii-r-iva Aritthaka ca Roja ca Umraa-puppha-nibhiisino Yaruna saha Dhammii ca Accutii ca Anejaka

Suleyya Pucirii agu, iigu Yasavanesino Das' ete dasadha kaya samitim vanam. pe
Samanii Mahasamanii Miinusainanusuttama

II

21

II

Khiddapadusika agu,

iigu

Manupadusikii

MAHASAMAYASUTTA.
Ath&gu Harayo
devii

117

Piiragii Mahiiparagii iigu

ye ca Lohitavasino deva yasassino

pe
saraitim vanam.
||

Das *ete
Sukhii

dasadhii kiiyii

22

II

Karumha Arunii agu Yeghanasa saha Odatagayhii Pamokkha agu deva Vicakkhana
:

Sadiimatta Haragaja Missaka ca yasassino Thanayara agu Pajjunno yo disa abhivassati

Das' ete dasadha kaya

pe

samitim vanam.

II

23

II

Khemlyii Tusita Yiiraa Katthakii ca yasassino

nama ca Asava Nimmanaratino agu ath' agu Paranimmita Das' ete dasadha kaya samitim vanam. pe
Larabitakii Liimasettha Joti
Satth' ete deva-nikaya sabbe nanatta-vannino Nama-dvayena aganchum ye c' aniie sadisa saha
*

II

24

II

Pamutthajjitim akhllara oghatinnam anasavam Dakkhem' oghataram Nagam candam va asitatigam.'

II

25

II

Subrahma Paramatto ca putta iddhimato saha Sanam kumaro Tisso ca so p' agu samitim vanam. 26
II

II

Sahassa Brahmalokanam

Mahabrahma

bhititthati
II

Upapanno jutimanto bhismakayo

yasassl so.
;

27

II

Das' ettha issara agu pacceka-vasavattino Tesaiica majjhato agu Harito parivarito. 28
II

II

Te ca sabbe abhikkante sa-Inda-deve sa-brahmake

Marasena abhikkami
*
:

Passa kanhassa mandiyam.

||

29

1|

Ettha ganhatha bandhatha ragena bandham atthu ve Samanta parivaretha ma vo muficittha koci nam.' 30
||

1|

Iti tattha mahaseno kanhasenam apesayi Panina talam ahacca saram katvana bheravam Yatha pavussako megho thanayanto savijjuko Tada so paccudavatti sankuddho asayam vasl. I|31||

Tauca sabbam abhinnaya pavakkhitvana cakkhumu Tato amantayi sattha siivake siisane rate Marasena abhikkantu te vijanatha bhikkhavo P
:

118

ALAVAKASUMTA.

Te ca atappam akalrum
Yitariigeh'

sutvii

Buddhassa sasanam.
pi iujayum.
||

apakkamum na sam lomam

32

1|

Sabbe vijita sarigamii-bhay&bhita yasassino Modanti saha bhutehi suvaku te jane sutati.

i|33||

MAHASAMAYASUTTAM.

NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMASAMBUDHASSA.

Ekam saraayam Bhagava Alaviyam Yakkhassa bhavane. Atha kho Alavako Yakkho yena Bhagava ten' upasahkami upasankamitva Bhaga van tarn etad avoca " Nikkhama samanH " ti. " Sadhavuso " ti. Bhagava nikkhami. " Pavisa samani " ti. " * Sadh&vuso " ti. Bhagavii pavisi. kho Alavako yakkho Bhagavantam etad avoca Dutiyam pi *' Nikkhama samana " ti. " Sadhavuso " ti. Bhagava nikkliami. " Pavisa samana " ti.
Evam me
sutara
:

viharati Alavakassa

'

'

'

" 'Sadhavuso

"
ti.

Bhagava

pavisi.

Tatiyam pi kho Alavako yakkho Bhagavantam etad avoca: " Nikkhama samana " ti. " Sadhavuso " ti. Bhagava nikkhami. " Pavisa samanaL " ti. " Sadhavuso ** ti. Bhagava pavisi. Catutthara pi kho Alavako yakkho Bhagavantam etad " avoca " Nikkhama samana ti. " 'Na kho pan&ham avuso nikkhamissiimi. Yan te karanl*
' '

yam

tarn karohi

"

ti.

Sace me na bya"Paiihara tam samana pucchissami. va te karissasi, cittam khipissami, hadayain va te phalessami,

padesu va gahetva param Gangaya khipissami

ti."

AI.AVAKASUTTA.
" 'Na khviiham
tain, avuso, passilmi

119

rake, sabrahmake, sassaraana

nussjiya,

sadevake loke, samabruhmaniya pajiiya sadevamavii

yo

me

cittam

vii

khipeyya, hadayara
'

phaleyya,

padesu gahetvji pjiram Gangiiya khipeyya. " avuso puccha yadu kankhasi ti.

vii

Api ca tvam

"Xim sMha

vittam purisassa settham? kimsu sucinno

?

sukham avahati ? Kimsu have siidhutaram rasaaam ahu setthan ? " ti. 1
|| 1|

katham jivim jivitam

"

Saddh' idha vittam purisassa settham,

dhammo

sucinno

sukham avahati, Saecam have sadhutaram rasanam, ahu setthan'" ti. ||2||
" Kathamsu
tarati

parina jIvim jivitam

Kathamsu

ogham ? kathain tarati annavam ? dukkham acceti ? kathamsu parisujjha-

titi?"||3||

"

Saddhaya

tarati

ogham, appamadena annavam,

'

Viriyena dukkham

"
||4||

acceti, pafinaya parisujjhati.

?

" Kathamsu labhate patinam

kathamsu vindate dhanam? Kathamsu kittim pappoti? katham mittani gantheti ? Asma loka param lokam katham pecca na socati ? " 5
|| 1|

"

'

Saddahauo arahatam dhammam nibbanapattiya Sussusam labhate parliiam appamatto vicakkhano. Patirupakarl dhurava vutthata vindate dhanam
Saccena kittim pappoti dadam mittani ganthati,

Asmii loka param lokain evam pecca na

socati.

Yass' ete caturo dhammil saddhassa gharamesino Saecam dhammo dhiti cago sa ve pecca na socati.

Ingha anne pucchassu puthu samanabriihmane Yadi sacca dama caga khanty&bhiyyo' dha vijjati. "
'

||6|I

"

Katham nu dani puccheyyam puthu samanabriihmane Sv4ham ajja pajanami so attho saraparayiko. Atthaya vata mo Buddho viisayalavim itgato

120

PARABHAVASUTTA.
Yo* ham ajja pajanami yattha dinnam roahapphalam So aham vicarissami giirailgamam purapurara
Naraassaraano

sambuddham dhammassa
II7II

ca

sudham-

matan"

ti.

ALAVAKASUTTAM.

Evam me sutam

Ekam samayam

Bhagavii Savatthiyara

viharati Jetavane Aniithapindikassa ariime. Atha kho ailfiatara devata abhikkantaya rattiya abhikkantavannii kevala-

kappam Jetavanam

obhiisetva, yena Bhagava ten* upasankami upasahkaraitva Bhagavantam abhiviidetvii ekamantani atthasi, ekamantara thita kho sa devata Bhagavantam gathaya ajjhabhasi.
**

Parabhavantam purisam mayam pucchiima Gotaraarn Bhagavantam putthum iigamma kim parabhavato

mukham?"
**
*

||i||

Suvijiino

bhavam

hoti, suvijano parjlbhavo

hoti,

Dhammakamo bhavam
vo.'"||2||

dhammadessi

parabha-

" Iti h' etam vijaniima

pathamo
bruhi
:

so pariibhavo

Dutiyam Bhagava kham?"||3||

"
*

kim

parabhavato

mu-

Asant* assa

piyji honti, sante

*

na kurute piyam

asantam

dhammam
II

roceti

tam

parabhavato

mu-

kham.'"

II

"Iti h' etam vijjinaraa dutiyo so pariibhavo tatiyam Bhagava bruhi: kim parabhavato mukham?"
:

||

1|

"

Niddasill

sahJisTli anutthatii

alaso kodhapannjito,

tam parabhavato mukham.' "

:

ca yo naro

||6||

" Iti

h'

etam

vijaniiraa

tatiyo so pariibhavo

catuttham

Bhagavii
1I7||

bruhi

kim

pariibhavato

mu-

kham?"

rARABHAVASUTTA.
"
*

121

Yo miltaram vii pitaram va jinnakaip gata-yobbanam pahusanto na bharati, tarn pariibhavato mukham.*" ||8||
Iti h*

"

etam

vijaniiraa

catuttho so parabhavo
:

paucamam Bhagava bruhi

kim

parabhavato

mu-

kham?"
"
'

|!9||

Yo brahraanam kam
h'

va samanam va annam va pi vanibba-

rausavadena vaBceti, tam parabhavato raukham.'

"
||

10

1|

" Iti

etam vijanama

chattham
"

Bhagava
1|11||

paiicamo so parabhavo bruhi kim parabhavato

:

mu-

"kham?"
*

PahQvitto puriso sa-hiranno sa-bhojano " eko bhufijati sadhuni, tam parabhavato mukhara.'
Iti h' etam vijanama sattamam Bhagava
:

||12||

**

chattho so parabhavo

bruhi

kim parabhavato

mu-

kham?"||13||
"
*

Jatitthaddho, dhanatthaddho, gottatthaddho ca yo naro

tam iiatim
"
Iti h'

atimafineti,
:

tam parabhavato mukham.' "

sattamo so parabhavo

I|14||

Attham Bhagava bruhi kim parabhavato mukham ? " ||15I|

:

etam vijanama

"

'

Itthidhutto, suradhutto, akkhadhutto ca

yo naro

laddham
"

kham.'
Iti h'

laddhara "
||16*l|

vinaseti,

tam

parabhavato

mu-

etam vijanama

atthamo so parabhavo
bruhi
:

navamam
*

Bhagava
||

kim parabhavato

mu-

kham?"

17

1|

" Sehi darehi santuttho vesiya upadissati

dissati paradaresu,

tam parabhavato mukham.*"

:

||18||

" Iti h' etam vijanamo

navamo
bruhi
:

so

parabhavo
parabhavato

dasamam
**
*

Bhagava
||

kim

mu-

kham?"
tassa issa

19

1|

Atlta-yobbano poso aneti timbarutthanim

na

supati,

tam parabhavato mukham.'"

||20||

122

VASALASUTTA.
:

" Iti h' etam vijaniima

dasamo
briihi
:

so

parabhavo

ekiidasamam

Bhagavu kham?"||21||

kim

parjibhavato

mu-

"

vJi pi tadisam " tarn issariyasmim thiipeti ||22|| pariibhavato mukham.'

Itthl-sondim vikiranim purisara

"

Iti h'

etam vijaniima
|l

ekiidasamo so parabhavo
briihi:

dvadasamarn Bhagava kham ?" 23

1|

kirn

pariibhavato

mu-

'*

'

Appabhogo
so

raahiitanho khattiye jiiyate kule

'dha

kham.'
*'
*

rajjam "
||

patthayati
1|

tam

pariibhavato

mu-

24

Ete pariibhave loke pandito samavekkhiya ariyo dassana-sarapatto salokam bhajate sivau'"

ti. ||25||

PARABHAVASUTTAM.

NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO AUAHATO SAMMASAMBUDDHASSA.

Evarn
viharati

me sutam
Jetavane

Ekara samayara Bhagava Siivatthiyam Atha kko Aniithapindikassa iiriime.

nivasetvii pattaclvaram
iidiij'a

Bhagava pubbanha samayara

Siivatthiyam pindiiya
hoti iihuti paggahitii.
piivisi.

Tena kho

pand saraayena

Aggika-Bhiiradviijassa briihmanassa nivesane aggi pajjalito

||

1|

Atha kho Bhagavii Siivatthiyam sapadiinam

pindiiya cara-

mano, yena Aggika-Bhiiradviijassa briihmanassa nivesanam, Addasii kho Aggika-Bhiiradviijo ten' uppasankami. ||2||
briihmano Bhagavantam dilrato agacchantara disviiua Bhagavantam etad avoca " Tatr' eva mundaka, tatr' eva samanaka, tatr' eva vasalaka 3 titthiThi ti."
:
|| 1|

Evam

vutte
:

Bhagava Aggika-Bhiiradviijam briihraanam

etad avoca

VASALASUTTA.

123

va dhamrae

" * Junilsi pana tvam briihmana, vasalam va vasala-karane "

ti.'

||4||

khvaham, bho Gotaraa, janjimi vasalam va vasalakarane vii dhamme ti. Sadhu me bhavam Gotamo tatha

"Na

dhammara
karane va
"
*

desetu

yathaham janeyyam vasalam va

ti."

vasala-

dhamme
hi,

Tena

bhasissami

"
ti.'

brahraana, sunahi siidhukam manasikarohi 5

|| (I

"Evam bho"

ti

gavato paccassosi.

kho Aggika-Bharadvajo brahmauo Bha6 Bhagava etad avoca

:
|| 11

Xodhano upanahl ca papamakkhi ca yo naro

vipannaditthi mayavl, tarn jafina vasalo
iti.
II

II

Ekajam va dijam va

pi

yo 'dha panani himsati.

jaiifia

yassa pane daya n'atthi, tarn

vasalo

iti.

||2||

Yo

hanti parirundhati giimani nigamani ca

iti. ||3||

niggahako samannato, tarn janiia vasalo

Game va yadi varanfie yam paresam mamayitam theyya adinnam adiyati, tarn jafifia vasalo iti. ||4||

Yo
na

have inara adiiya vuccamano palayati

hi te

inam

atthiti, tarn

janna vasalo

iti. ||5||

Yo ve kincikkha-kamyata panthasmim vajatam janam hantva kincikkham adeti, tarn janiia vasalo iti. ||6||

Yo attahetu parahetu dhanahetu ca yo naro sakkhiputtho musabruti, tarn jaiina vasalo iti. Yo
natinam sakhanam va daresu
patidissati

||7||

sahasa sampiyena va, tarn janna vasalo

iti. ||8||

Yo mataram

vii

pitaram va jinnakam gatayobbanam

tarn

pahusanto na bharati,

janna vasalo

iti.

||9

1|

Yo mataram
Yo attham

va pitaram va bhiitaram va bhaginim

iti.
||

sassum hanti roseti va, tam janna vasalo

10

1|

pucchito santo anattham anusiisati.

iti.
||

paticchantena manteti, tam janna vasalo

1111

124

VASALASUTTA.

Yo

katvii piipalcam

karamam

mji

mam jafifiil

'

ti

icchati

80 paticchaiina-kammaiito, tarn junnii vasalo

iti. ||12||

Yo Yo

ve parakulam gantva bhutvana sucibhojanam agatam na patlpujeti, tam jafifia vasalo iti. ||13||
briibraanam vii samanain va

anuam va
iti.

pi vanibbakara
||14||

musavadena

vanceti, tarn jafifia vasalo

Yo brahmanam
roseti vaca

va samanam va bbattakale upattbite

deti,

na ca

tam janfia

vasalo

iti. ||15||

Asatam yo 'dba pabriiti mobena paliguntbite kincikkbam nijigimsano, tam janna vasalo iti.

||16||

Yo

c'attanarn

samukkamse

parafica avajanati
iti.
||

nibino sena manena, tain janna vasalo

17

1|

Rosako kadariyo ca papiccho maccbarl satbo

abiriko anottapl, tain janfia vasalo
iti.

||18(|

Yo buddbam Yo
ete

paribhiisati atba

va tassa savakam
vasalo
iti. ||19||

paribbajam gabattham. va,

tam janna

ve anaraba santo, arabam

patijiiniiti
!

coro sabrabraake loke esa

kbo vasaladbamo
pakasitii.
||

kbo vasala vutta may a vo ye

20

1|

Na jacca

kammana
"

vasalo hoti, na jacca boti brabmano vasalo boti, kammana boti brabmano.
pi jantitba yatba

||21||

Tadamina

me 'dam
iti

nidassanam

CandJilaputto Sopiiko Miitango

vissuto. ||22[|

So yasam paramam patto Miitango

yam sudullabbam

agancbum tass'upatthanamkbattiya brahmanjibabu. H23||

So devayjinam iiruyha virajam so mabiipatbam kamaragam virajetva brabmalokupago iibu. ||24||

Na nam

jiiti

nivjiresi

brabraalokQpapattiya,
:
||

mantabandbuno 25 Te ca papcsu kammesu abhinbain upadissare dittb 'eva dbamrae garayhii sampariiye ca duggatim " na te jati nivareti duggacca garabaya va: ||26||
ajjbiiyakiikule jiita brahmanii

1|

kasIbharadvajasutta.

126

Na jacca
kammana

vasalo hoti,

vasalo hoti,

na jacca hoti brahmano kammana hoti brahmano.

||27||

Evam

vutte Aggika-Bharadvajo brahmano Bhagavantain

:

Abhikkantam, bho Gotama, abhikkantam bho Gotama nikkujjitain va ukkujjeyya, paticchannarn va vivareyya, inu}hassa va maggam acikkheyya, andhakare va telapajjotam evam eva dhiireyya cakkhumanto rupani dakkhinantiti bhota Gotamanena aneka pariyayena dhamrao pakasito. Es^hain Bhagavantam Gotamam saranam gacchami dhammanca bhikkhusahghaiica Upasakam mam bhavam Gotamo " 7 dharetu, ajjatagge panupetam saranam gatan ti
!
:
!

etad avoca " *

'

||

li

VASALASUTTAM.

NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO AEAHATO SAMMA

SAMBUDDHASSA.
Evam me sutam
:

Ekam samayam Bhagava Magadhesu

||

viharati Dakkhiniigirismiin

Ekanalayam brahmanagiime. 1 Tena kho pana samayena Kasibharadviijassa brahmanassa

1|

paiicamattani nangala-satiini payuttani honti vappakiile.

||2||

Atha kho Bhagava pubbanhasaraayam nivasetva patta-clvaram adaya yena Kaslbhilradvajassa brahmanassa kammanto, ten' upasafikami. 3 Tena kho pana samayena Kasibhabrahmanassa radviijassa parivesana vattati. ||4|| Atha kho
|| 1|

Bhagava yena parivesanii ten' upasankami upasankamitva ekamantam atthasi. addasa kho Kasibharadvajo brahmano

Bhagavantam etad avoca

kho, samana, kasami ca vaparai ca, kasitvii ca vapitva ca bhunjami. Tvam pi samana kasassu ca vapassu kasitvii ca vapitva ca bhunjassu ti." " * Aham pi kho, briihmana, kasiimi ca vapami ca kasitvii ca vapitva ca bhunjiimi " Na kho
ti.'

"Aham

"

pana
vii

mayam

passiima bhoto Gotamassa yugara

vii."

vii

nangalam

phiilam va piicanam vu balivaddam

126

kasTbharadvajasutta.
:

Atha ca pana bhavam Gotamo evain aha " Aham pi kho brahmana kasaini ca vapiitni ca kasitva
*

ca vapitva ca bhunjiiiniti.'

"

Atha kho Kaslbhiiradvajo

ajjhabhiisi:
\\b\\

briihraano

Bhagavantam gathaya

" Kassako patijanasi na ca passama te kasim kasino pucchito bruhi, yatha janemu te kasim." "
*

||

1|

Saddha bijam, tapo

hirim
Tsii,

vutthi, panfia
sati

me

yuga-nangalara

phiilapaeanam. ||2|| Kiiyagutto vacTgutto iihare udare yato saccam karomi tiddtinam soraccam me pamocanam. ||3||

mano yottam,

me

Viriyara

me dhura-dhorayham yogakkhemadhivahanam
socati.
||4||

gacchati ativattanam yattha gantvii na

Evam

" etam kasim kasitvana sabbadukkba pamuccatiti.'

esa kasi katthii sa hoti amatapphala

||5||

Atha kho Kaslbharadviijo briihmano mahatiya kamsiipatiya

payasam vaddhetva Bhagavato upanamesi " Bhunjatu bhavam Gatamo payasam Kassako bhavam, yamhi bhavam Gotamo amatapphalam kiisim kiisatiti." 6
: !
i|

1|

"

Gathabhigltam me abhojaneyyam sampassatam brahmana n' esa dhammo

dhamme
"
*

gathabhigltam panudanti buddhii " sati, brahmana, vutti-r-esa.'

||6||

Aiinena ca kevalinam mahesim

khin&savam kukkuccavupasantara annena piiuena upatthahassu " kbettam hi tain punnapekhassa hotiti/
" Atha kassa c&hara bho Gotama
*'
'

||7||

payitsam dammiti." tam, brahmana, passiirai sadevake loke samarake sabrahmake sassamanabriihraaniya pajiiya sadeva-

imam

Na khvaham

yassa so payaso bhutto sammii pariniimam annatra Tathagatassa vii Tathiigatasiivakassa va gaccheyya, tena hi tvam, brahmana, tam payasam appaharite va chaddeti appjinake va udake opilapehiti. 7

manussaya,

||

|j

Atha kho Kaslbhiiradvajo brahmano tam payasam appa-

SACCAVIBHANOA.
nake udake
opililpesi.

127
udake pakkhitto
:

Atha kho

so piiyaso

seyyaciccitayati ciccitiiyati sandhiipayati sampadhiipayati thapi niima phiilo divasti santatto udake pakkhitto ciccitiiyati
ciccitayati
pjiyiiso

sandliupiiyati

sampadhiipayati

evam

eva

so

udake pakkhitto
||8||

ciccitayati ciccitiiyati sandhupiiyati

sampadhiipayati.

Atha kho
jiito

Kaslbhiiradviijo briihmano
ten'

yena Bhagavii vato piidesu sirasii nipatitvii Bhagavantam etad avoca " Abhikkantam, bho Gotama, abhikkantam, bho Gotama
:

samviggo lomahatthaupasankami upasankamitva Bhaga!

seyyathapi bho Gotama nikkujjitam vii ukkujjeyya, patichannam va vivareyya, miilhassa va maggam acikkheyya, andhakare va telapajjotam dhiireyya cakkhumanto rupani Evam eva, bho Gotama, aneka pariyayena dakkhintiti
:

dbammo pakiisito. Esaham bhagavantam Gotamam saranam gacchiimi dhammaiica bhikkhu-sanghailca. Labheyyarn
ahara bhoto Gotamassa santike pabbajjam labheyyarn upasampadan ti." 9
|| 1|

Alattha kho Kaslbharadviijo brahmano Bhagavato santike

pabbajjam, alattha upasarapadara. Acirupasampanno kho eko viipakattho appamatto atiipl pan' ayasmii Bhiiradviijo
pahitatto

viharanto na cirass' eva yass'

atthiij'a

sammad eva agarasma anagiiriyam pabbajanti, tad ram brahmacariya-pariyosiinam ditth' eva dhamme
abhiiiiia sacchikatva upasarapajja vihiisi.

kulaputta anuttasayam.

" Khlnii

jati,

vusitara brahmacariyam,

katam karanlyam,

naparam

itthattiij'ati," abhiunii anfiataro

||10||

ca kho pan' ayasmii

Bharadviijo arahatara ahositi.

KASIBHARADVAJASUTTAM.

NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMASAMBUDDHASSA.

Ekara samayam Bhagavii Biininasiyam Tatra kho Bhagavii bhikkhu amantesi: 'bhikkhavo' ti, 'bhadante* ti. Te bhikkhu Bhasutain
:

Evam me

viharati Isipatane Migadiiye.

gavato paccassosum.

Bhagavii etad avoca

II

1|

128
"

SACCAVIBHANGA.
Tathagatena,

bhikkhave,

arahatii

sammitsainbuddhena

Buninasiyam Isipatane Migadilye anuttaram dhammacakkam pavattitam appativattiyam saruanena vu bruhmanena vii
devena va Miirena va Brahrauna va kenaci va lokasmin
ti.

Yad idam
patji

catunnain ariyasaccanam acikkhata desatil

?
.

pafifia-

patthapata vivaranii vibhajanji uttaDakammam.

Katamesam catunnam

Dukkhassa ariyasaccassa acikkhata pe Dukkhasamudayassa ariyasaccassa acikkhata Dukkhanirodhassa ariyasaccassa acikkhata

Dukkhanirodhagaiuinlpatipada pe
Tathagatena,
.11211

pe
pe

ariyasaccassa

acikkhata

bhikkhave,

arahata

sammasambuddhena

Baranasiyam Isipatane Migadaye anuttaram dhamraacakkain pavattitam appativattiyam samanena va brahmanena va devena va Marena va Brahrauna vii kenaci va lokasmim
:

yad

idam
11311

imesam catunnam

ariyasaccanam

acikkhata

pe. "

Sevetha, bhikkhave, Sariputta-Moggalhme, bhejatha, bhi-

kkhave, Sariputta-Moggallane pandita bhikkhu anuggahaka brahmacarinam seyyathapi bhikkhave, janetti evam Sari:

putto: seyyathapi jatassa apiidetiievam Moggallano.

Sari-

putto, bhikkhave, sotapatti-phale vineti ; Moggallano iittamatthe vineti ; Sariputto, bhikkhave, pahoti cattiiri ariyasaccjini vittharena

acikkhitum desetum paiinapetum vivarituni

ti.
:

vibhajitura uttaniikiitun

Idam avoca Bhagavii

viharara pavisi.
II

idam vatva Sugato utthayasana

1|

Tatra kho iiyasma Sariputto acirapakkantassa Bhagavato bhikkhu amantesi 'Avuso bhikkhavo' ti 'avuso* ti kho. te bhikkhii ayasmato
:

Ayasraa Sariputto etad avoca "Tathagatena, avuso, arahata sammasambuddhena Baranasiyam Isipatane Migadaye anuttaram dhammacakkam pavattitam appativattiyam samanena va brahmanena va
Sariputtassa paccassosum
: :

devena va Marena va BrahmunJi

vii

kenaci

vii

lokasmim:
.
II

yad idam catunnam

ariyasacciinaTn iicikkhatii

pe

1|

SACCAVIBHANOA.

129

Xatamesam catunnam ? Dukkhassa ariyasaccassa ilcikkhata pe pe Dukkhasamudayassa ariyasaccassa ticikkhata Dukkhanirodhassa ariyasaccassa acikkhatu pe
pe
.11611

Bukkhanirodhagaminlpatipadassa ariyasaccassa acikkhatu

dukkhara ariyasaccam ? pi dukkhii, jarii pi dukkha, vyiidhi pi dukkha, maranam pi dukkhara, soka-parideva-dukkha-domanass-upayasa dukkha yam p' iccham na labhati tarn pi dukkham, sanKataraa " Jati
ca, avuso,
:

khittena pane' upadiinakkhandha dukkha. Katamii ca avuso jiiti ?

Ya

tesam tesam sattiinam tamhi tamhi sattanikaye

jati

sanjati okkanti abhinibbatti khandhiinain piitubhavo ayatinanain patiliibho. Ayam vuccat' avuso jati. ||1||

Katama

ca avuso jara ?

Ya

tesam tesam sattanam tamhi tamhi sattanikaye jara,

jTranata,

khandiccam, paliccam valittacata ayuno samhani indriyanam paripako. Ayam vuccat' avuso jara. ||2||

Katama

ca avuso

maranam ?

tesam tesam sattiinam tamha tamha sattanikaye cuti cavanata bhedo antaradhanam maccu maranam kalakiriya
khandhiinara

Ya

bhedo kalebarassa nikkhepo.

||3||

Idam

vuccat'

avuso maranam.

Katama

ca avuso soko ?

Yo kho
socanti

tassa annatarannatarena

avuso afiiiatarannatarena byasanena samannagadukkhadhammena phutthassa soko

antosoko antoparisoko.

socanattam
||4||

Ayam

vuccat'

avuso soko.

Katama

ca iivuso paridevo ?

Yo kho
paridevo

tassa annatarannatarena
iidevo

avuso annatarannatarena byasanena samannagadukkhadhammena phutthassa adevo

paridevo iidevanJi paridevana adevitattam Ayam vuccat' iivuso paridevo. 5
II 1|

paridevitattara. Katama ca dukkham?

Yam

kho

iivuso

kayikam

dukkham

kiiyikam

kiiya-

samphassajam dukkham asiitam vedayitam. avuso dukkham. 6

|j

Idam

vuccat'

1|

130

SACCAVIBHANGA.
^l^also domanossam P kho avuso cetasikam dukkham cetasikam

Katamu

ca

Yam

asiitam

ma-

nosamphassajam dukkham asutam vedayitam. uvuso domanassam. 7

II II

Idam

vuccat*

atamii ca iivuso upayiiso ? Yo kho iivuso anfjatarannatarena byasanena saraannugatena aniiatarannatarena dukkhadhammena phutthassa uyiiso upii-

yaso ayiisitattam upayasitattam.

'

Ayam

vuccat' avuso upa-

yaso.

II8II

Katama ca avuso yam p' iccham na labhati tarn pi dukkham ? Jatidhammanam cTvuso sattanam evam iccha uppajjati "aho vata mayam na jatidhammii assama, na ca vata no jati agaccheyy&ti na kho pan' etara icchjiya pattabbam." Idam pi yam p' iccham na labhati, tam pi dukkham. Jaradhammtinara iivuso sattiinam evam icchii uppajjati
: : :

mayam na jariidhamma assiima, na ca vata no jarii Idam iigaccheyyati na kho pan' etam icchiiya pattabbam." na labhati tam pi dukkham. pi yam p' iccham
*'aho vata
:

Byiidhidhammiinara avuso sattiinam evam icchii uppajjati " aho ca vata mayam na byiidhidhammii assiima, na ca vata no
:

na kho pan' etam icchiiya pattabbam." iccham na labhati tam pi dukkham. pi yam p' Maranadhammiinain iivuso sattiinam evam icchii uppajjati " aho ca vata mayam na maranadhamma assiima, na ca vata no maranarn iigaccheyyati na kho pan' etam icchiiya pattabbam." Idam pi yam p' iccham na labhati tam pi dukkham.
byiidhi agaccheyyati
:

Idam

sattiinam

Soka-parideva-dukkhadomanass-upiiyasii dhammiinam avuso evam icchii uppajjati " aho vata raayarn na soka:

paridevadukkhadomanassupiiyiisa dhammii assiima, na ca vata

no sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupiiyiisii iigaccheyum: na kho Idam pi yam p' iccham na pan* etam icchiiya pattabbam." labhati tam pi dukkham. ||9||
Katamii c&vuso sankhittena pancupiidiinakkhandhii dukkhii?
Seyyathldara Riipupiidiinakkhandho, vedanupiidiinakkhandho, sanfiupiidiinakkhandho, saiikhiirupiidiinakkhandho, viIme vuccat' iivuso sankhittena ilnanupiidiinakkhandhii.
:

pailcupadiiQakkhandhii dukkhii.

||

10

1|

SACCAVIBHANGA.

131
||7I|

Idam

vuccat* iivuso dukkhara ariyasaccam.

ca avuso dukkhasamudayam ariyasaccam ? tanba ponobbhavikanandiraga-sahagata tatra tatriYayara bbinaadinl seyyathldam

: :

Xatama

Kiimatanba bbavatanba vibbavatanba.

Idara vuccat' avuso

dukkbasamudayam ariyasaccam.

||

1|

Katama

ca avuso dukkbanirodbam ariyasaccam ?

yeva tanbaya asesaviraganirodbo ciigo patinissago mutti analayo. Idam vuccat' avuso dukkbanirodbam ariyasaccam. [|9||

Yo

tassa

Katama
saccam
?

ca avuso dukkbanirodbagaraini patipada ariya-

sammadittbi, sammasankappo, sammavaca, sammakammanto, sammaajlvo, samma-vayamo, sammasati, sammasamadbi.

Ayam

eva ariyo attbangiko maggo

seyyatbidam

Katama

ca avuso sammadittbi ?

Yam

kbo avuso dukkbe-fianam, dukkbasamudaye-nanam,

|| 1|

dukkbanirodbe-nanam, dukkbanirodba-gaminlpatipadaya-nanam. ^Ayam vuccat' avuso sammadittbi. 1

Katama
kappo.

ca avuso

sammasankappo

Nekkbammasankappo

abyilpadasahkappo
II

avibimsasan-

Ayam

vuccat' avuso

Katama

ca avuso

sammasankappo. sammavaca ?

II

Musavjidii veramani pisunavacaya veramani pbarusavacjiya veramani sampbappalapaya veramani. Ayam vuccat' avuso sammavaca. ||3||

Katama

ca avuso

sammakammanto ?

Panatipjita veramani adinnadanii veramani kiimesu miccbilcara veramani. Ayam vuccat' avuso sammakammanto. ||4||

Katama
ajlvena
ajivo.
II

ca avuso samma-ajlvo.

Idb' avuso ariyasavako miccba

jivikam
5
II

kappeti.

Ayam

ajlvam pabaya, sammavuccat' avuso samma

Katama

ca avuso samraavayiimo ?

Idb' avuso bbikkbu anuppanniinam papakiinam akusalanam

182

SACCAVIBHANGA.

dhammiinam

anuppildiiya chandam janeti vayamati viriyam urabhati cittam pagganhuti padahati.

Uppanniinam papakilnam akusaliinam dhammunam pahiipe padahati. nuya chandam janeti kusahTnam dhammunam Anuppannanara uppiidiiya chandam
janeti

pe

padahati.
thitiya

Uppannanam kusaliinam dhammanam

asammohiiya

bhiyo bhiivuya vepulliiya bhavaniiya paripfiriya chandam Ayam janeti vayamati viriyam arabhati cittam padahati.
vuccat* iivuso sammavayiimo. ||6|| Katama ca avuso sammasati ?

Idh' avuso bhikkhu kiiye kilyanupassi viharati jano satima vineyya loke abhijjhadomanassam.

atiipl

sampa-

Yedana vedananupassi
domanassam.
Citte
citt&nupassi

viharati

atapl

pe pe

abhijjha-

viharati

atapl

abhijjhado-

manassam.

Dhamme dhammanupassi

viharati atapl sampajano satima

vineyya loke abhijjhadomanassam. Ayam vuccat' iivuso sammasati. 7

II

1|

Katama
dhammehi

ca avuso sammiisamadhi ?

Idh' iivuso bhikkhu vivicc' eva kiimehi vivicca akusalehi,

savitakkam

saviciiram

vivekajam

pitisukham

pathamajjhjinam upasampajja Vitakkaviciiranam vupasamii

cetaso

viharati.

ajjhattam sampasiidanam ekodibhiivam avitakkam avicJiram samadhijam pitiviharati.

sukham dutiyajjhanam upasampajja

Pitiya ca

viriigii upekkhako ca viharati sato sampajano sukhanca kiiyena patisamvedeti yan tam ariyii acikkhanti

upekkhako satima sukhavihiirl

viharati.

ti

tatiyajjhiinara

upasampajja

Sukhassa ca

pahiinil

dukkhassa ca

pahiinji

pubbc ca soma-

nassa-domanassanara atthagamjl addukkham asukham upekkhiisati-parisuddhim catutthajjhanam upasampajja viharati. ^Ayam vuccat' iivuso sammiisamiidhi. 8
II |j

Idam
saccam.
II

vuccat' avuso dukkhanirodhagiiminlpatipada ariya-

10

11

ARUNAVATISUTTA.

133

Tathiigatena iivuso arahatii sammusarabuddhena Biirunasi-

yara Isipatane Migadaye anuttaram

dhammaoakkam

pavatti-

tam appativattiyara samanena vii brahmanena va devena va Marena vii Brahmunii vu kenaci vii lokasmim acikkhata
desata

kamman

pafinapata ti. 11
II II

patthapata vivarana

vibhajana uttana-

Idam avoca ayasma Sariputto attamanii mato Sariputtassa bhasitam abhinandun ti.

te

bhikkhu ayas-

SACCAVIBHANGA.

NAMO TASSA BHAGAYATO ARAHATO SAMMASAMBUDDHASSA.

Ekara samayam Bhagavii Savattbiyam Tatra kbo Anatbapindikassa arame. ' * * bbikkbu amantesi bhikkbavo ti ti. bbadante Bhagava
sutam
:

Evam me

viharati

Jetavane

Te bbikkbu Bhagavato paccassosum Bbagava etad avoca:

:

II

1|

Bbfltapubbam, bbikkbave, raja abosi Arunavii. Rafino kbo pana bbikkbave Arunavato Arunavati nama rajadbani
abosi.
II

"

II

Ariinavatiyam kbo pana bbikkbave rujadbanlyam Sikbl

Bbagava Arabam Sammasambuddbo upanissaya vibasi. 3 Sikhissa kbo pana bbikkbave Bbagavato Arabato Sammasambuddbassa Abhibbu Sambbavam nama savakayugam
II

II

abosi

aggam bbaddayugam. ||4|| Atba kbo, bbikkbave, Sikbl Bbagava Arabam Sammasambuddbo Abbibbum bbikkbum amantesi 5 " Ayama brabmana yena anfiataro brabmaloko ten' upa:
|| 1|

safikamissama yiiva bbattassa

kiilo bbavissati."

||

1|

Evam
Sikhissa
ssosi. 11711

bbante

te bbikkbave Abbibbu bhikkhu Arabato Sammasambuddhassa paccaBhagavato

ti

kbo

Atba kbo, bbikkbave, Sikbl Bhagavii Arabam Sammasambuddbo Abhibbu ca bhikkhu scyyathapi nama balavu
:

134
puriso
samraifljitam

ARUNAVATISUTTA.
vu
||

baham

pasiireyya

pasaritam

va

baham

Evam

sammifijeyya. evara Arunavatiya rajadhaniya antarahita tasmim

II

brahmaloke paturahesum.

Atha kho, bhikkhave, Sikhl Bhagava Araham Samma" Patibhatu sambuddho Abhibhum bhikkhum iimantesi brabmana tam brabmuno ca brahma-parisa ca brabmapari:

sajjanam ca dhamml kathji ti." ||9|| Evam bhante ti kbo bhikkhave Abhibhu bhikkhu Sikhissa

Bhagavato Arahato Sammiisambuddhassa patissutvii brahmanauca brahmaparisanca brahmaparisajje ca dhammiya kathaya

sandassesi samiidapesi samuttejesi sampahamsesi. IllOli Tatra sudara bhikkhave brahma ca brahmaparisa

ca

brahmaparisajjii ca ujjhayanti khiyanti vipacenti. Acchariyam vata bho abbhutara vata bho kathauhi
satthari

nama

sammukhlbhute savako

dhammam

desessatiti. ||11||

Atha kho bhikkhave Sikhl BhagavJi Araham Sammasambuddho Abhibhum bhikkhum amantesi " Ujjhayanti kho te brahmana brahma ca brahmaparisa ca acchariyam vata bho abbhutam vata brahmaparisajjii ca kathauhi nama satthari sammukhlbhute savako bho
: :

dhammam

desessatiti."

Tena hi tvam brahmana bhiyyo

so

mattaya brahmaiica
||

brahmaparisanca brahmaparisajje ca saravejehiti.

12

II

Abhibhu bhikkhu Sikhissa Bhagavato Arahato Sammasambuddhassa patissutva

bhante
ti

Evam

kho

bhikkhave

dissamiinena pi kayena

dhammam
:

kayena
:

dhammam

desesi

desesi adissamiinena pi dissamiinena hetthimena upaddha-

kayena, adissamiinena uparimena upaddhakiiyena dhammam dissamiinena pi uparimena upaddhakiiyena, adissadesesi miinena hetthimena upaddhakiiyena pi dhammam desesi. ||13||

Tatra sudam bhikkhave brahmii ca brahmaparisii ca brahmaca acchariyabbhuta-citta-jiitii ahesum. Acchariyam piirisajjii
vata bho abbhutam vata bho samanassa mahiddhikata mah&nubhiivatati.
||14||

Atha kho Abhibhil bhikkhQ Sikhira Bhagavantara Arahantam Sammasambuddham etad avoca
:

ARUNAVATISUTTA.
"

135

Abhijanami khv&ham bhante bhikkhusaughassa maj jhe evariipam viicam bhasita, pahomi khvahara avuso brahraaloke thito sahassllokadhatura sarena vinnapetun ti. Etassa brahraa-

na kalo yam tvam brahmana brahmaloke thito sahassi-lokadhatum sarenavinuapeyyasiti. ||15|| Evam bhante ti kho bhikkhave Abhibhii bhikkhu Sikhissa Bhagavato Arahato Sammasambuddhassa patissutva brahmaloke thito ima giithayo abhasi
:

Arabhatha, nikkamatha, yufijatha Buddhasiisane Dhunatha maccuno senaiu nalikeram va kufijaro.

||

1|

Yo imasmim dhammavinaye

appamatto vihassati dukkhassantam karissatlti. Pahaya jatisamsaram

||2||

Atha kho bhikkhave Sikhl ca Bhagava Araham Sammasambuddho Abhibhii ca bhikkhu brahmanca brahmaparisaiica
brahmaparisajje ca samvejetva seyyathapi nama balava puriso samminjitaip. va baham pasareyya pasaritam va baham
:

sammifijeyya

evam eva tasmim brahmaloke antarahita

||16||

Arii-

navatiya rajadhaniya paturahesum. Atha kho bhikkhave Sikhi Bhagava

:

Araham Sammasam-

buddho bhikkhu amantesi "Assuttha no tumhe bhikkhave Abhibhussa bhikkhuno

brahmaloke thitassa gathayo bhasamanassa ti." ||17|| "'Assumha kho mayam bhante Abhibhussa bhikkhuno brahmaloke thitassa gathayo bhasamanassa ti.'" I|18||
" Yatha katham pana tumhe bhikkhave assuttha Abhibhussa bhikkhuno brahmaloke thitassa gathayo bhasamanass4
ti."
II

19

II

"*Evam kho mayam

kkhuno brahmaloke
"

bhante assumha Abhibhussa bhi-

thitassa

gathayo bhasamanassa

Arabhattha, nikkamatha, yunjatha Buddhasasane Dhunatha maccuno senam nalikeram va kufijaro. 1

II

1|

"

Yo imasmim dhammavinaye appamatto

Pahaya jatisamsaram dukkhassantam

vihassati
l|2||

korissati tL

136
"
*

DEVADAHASUTTA.

Evam kho mayam bhante assumha Abhibhussa bhikkhuno bmhmaloko thitassa gathilyo bhasamanassil ti.'" ||20|| "Siidhu, sildhu, bbikkhave, sadbu kho turahe bhikkhave
assuttha Abbibhussa bbikkbuno brahmaloke thitassa giithayo

bhasamanassa

ti.

I|21||

Idam avoca Bhagava

bbasitam abhinandun

attamana

te

bhikkhu Bhagavato

ti. ||22||

ARUNAVATISUTTAM.

NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMASAMBUDDHASSA.

sutam Ekam samayam Bhagava Sakkesu vihaDevadahan niima Sakyanam nigamo. Tatra kho Bhagava bhikkhu amantesi "Naham bhikkhave sabbe sanneva bhikkhiinam chasa
:

Evam me

rati

phass&yatanesu appamadena karanlyan ti vadiimi." "Na ca panaham bhikkhave sabbe sanneva bhikkhunam

chasu phassayatanesu nappamjidena karanlyan ti vadiimi." "Ye te, bhikkhave, bhikkhu arahanto khlniisava vusitavanto katakaraniya ohitabharii anupattasadatthti parikkhlna bhavasamyojana sammad-aililavimutta soham bhikkhiinam chasu
:

phassilyatanesu

"Tarn

kissa

pamajjitum.

nappamadena karanlyan ti vadiimi. 1 hetu? Katan tesu appamiidena abhabbate Ye ca kho te, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sekha
|| 1|

appattamiinasii anuttarara yogakkheraam patthayamiinii viharanti ; nes&hara bhikkhave bhikkhiinam chasu phassiiya-

tanesu appamiidena karanlyan ti vadiimi." ||2|| " Tam kIssa hetu ? Santi bhikkhave cakkhuvinneyyil,
riipii

manoramii pi amanoramii

pi.

Tyassa phussa cittani na

yam

pariyiidiiya titthati cetaso apariyiidiinii asalllnam upatthitii sati apamuttha

:

araddham

hoti viri-

raddho samilhitam cittam ekaggam

passaddho kiiyo asaimain khv^ham, bhi-

DEVADAHASUTTA.

137

kkhave, appamadassa phalam samphassa-miino tesam bhikkhilnam chasu phassayatanesu appamadena karanlyan ti
vadami.
||

||

Santi bhikkhave

ghanavinfieyya gandha manorama

pi

amanorama

pi.

||

||

rama

Santi bhikkhave jivhavinneyya rasa 5 pi.

il

manorama

pi

amano-

II

amanorama

Santi bhikkhave kayavinneyyii photthabba 6 pi.

|| ||

manorama

pi

Santi bhikhhave manovififieyya

dhamma manorama ama-

norama

pi.

cittam na pariyadaya titthati cetaso hoti viriyam asalllnam upatthita sati araddham apariyadtina apamuttha passaddho kayo asaraddho samahitam cittam imam khvaham bhikkhave appamadaphalam ekaggam samphassamano tesam bhikkhunam chasu phassayatanesu

Tyassa

phussa

appamadena karanlyan

ti

vadami.

||

1|

Liibha vo bhikkhave suladdhaip vo bhikkhave khano vo

patiladdho brahmacariya vasayati. Dittha mayii bhikkhave cha phassayataniinika

nama

Tatha

yam

kinci

cakkhunii rupam

passati

niraya. anittharu-

pan iieva passati neva itthariipam akantarupau iieva passati no kantarupam amanapariipan neva passati no manaparilpam. Yam kiuci sotena saddam sunati pe
.

Yam kiuci gbiinena gandham ghayati pe Yam kinci jivhaya rasam sayati pe Yam kiiici kayena photthabbam phusati pe Yam kiuci manasil dhammara vijanati anittharQpam yeva
.
. .

vijanati,

no ittharupam akantarupam yeva

vijanati,

no kanta-

rupam amanapariipam yeva vijanati no maniiparupara. ||8|| Labha vo, bhikkhave, suladdham vo, bhikkhave, khapo vo,
bhikkhave, patiladdho brahmacariyavasaya. Dittha maya, bhikkhave, cha-phassiiyatanika nilma saggit. Tuttha yam kinci cakkhuna rupam passati ittharupam
:

138

DEVADAHA8UTTA.
kantariipam yeva passati no manaparilpam yeva passati no amanapa:

yeva passati no anittharnpam

akantam rilpam
rupam. pe
.

manasu dhammam vijiinati ittharupam yeva no anittharupam vijanati, kantarupam yeva vijanati, no akantarupam manaparupam yeva vijanati, no amanaparOpam. ||9||
kifici
: :

Yam

Liibha vo bhikkhave, suladdham vo bhikkhave, khano vo

patiladdho brahraacariya vasay&ti. Ruparamii, bhikkhave, devamanussa
dita

riiparatii,

rupaviparinama-viraganirodha

dukkhii

rupasamubhikkhave

devamanussa viharanti.
Saddarama, bhikkhave,
pe pe
.

Gandharama, bhikkhave,
Rasarama, bhikkhave,
Dhamraaramii,

pe

Photthabbiirama, bhikkhave,

pe

bhikkhave,

devamanussa

dhammarata
du-

dhammaviparinama viraganirodha kkha, bhikkhave, devamanussa viharanti. I|10||

dhammasamudita

Tathagato ca kho, bhikkhave, Arahara Sammasambuddho

rupanam samudayailca atthagamanca assadafica adinavaoca nissarananca yathabhutam viditva na ruparamo, na ruparato na rupasamudito na rilpaviparijgiama yiriiganirodha sukho
bhikkhave Tathagato viharati. Saddanam pe
.

Gandhanam pe Kasanam pe
Photthabbanam

pe

Dhammanam samudayailca atthagamanca assadauca adlnavauca nissaranailca yathabhutam viditva na dhammaramo, na dhammarato, na dhammasamudito, na dhammaviparinama
:

viraganirodho sukho bhikkhave Tathagato viharatiti.

||11||

Idam avoca Bhagavii. etad avoca sattha

:

Idam vatva

ca Sugato

athaparam

DEVADAHASUTTA.

139

Ittha kanta

Bupu saddu gandha manapa

rasa phassa dhamma ca kevala ca yava tattha ti vuccanti. 1

il

1|

Sadevakassa lokassa ete vo sukhasammata

Yattha ce
tam.

te nirujjhanti tarn

tesam dukkham samma-

II2II

Sukham

tain ditthamariyehi sakkiiyassa nirodhanam Paccanlkam idam hoti sabbalokena passatam. 3

|| 1|

Yam pare sukhato ahu tad ariya ahu dukkhato Yam pare dukkhato ahu tad ariya sukhato vidu.
|| 1|

||4I|

Passadhammam duvijanam sammulhettha aviddasu Nivutanam tamo hoti andhakaro apassatam. 5

Satanca vivatam hoti aloko passatam iva
Santike na vijananti
kovida.

maggadhammassa

||6||

Bhavaraga-paretebhi bhavayoganusaribhi

Maradheyyanupannebhi nayamdhammosusambuddho. ||7||

Ko nu

Yam padam sammadaunaya

aunatram ariyebhi padi sambuddham arahati parinibbanti auasava ti.

i|

1|

DEVADAHASUTTAM.

PARITTAM NITTHITAM.

A COLLECTION OF KAMMAVACAS.

NAMO TASSA BHAGAYATO ARAHATO SAMMASAMBUDDHASSA.

Chap.
I.

THE ORDINATION OF A
pattacivaram acikkhitabbam ' " Ama bhante." * Ayan te patto ?
:

PRIEST.

Pathamam upajjham gahapetabbo, upajjham gahapetva

'

'

" Ama bhante." Ayam sanghati ? " Ama bhante." Ayam uttarasaiigo ? " Ama bhante." Ayam antaravasako ?
'

'

'

Gaccha amumhi, okase

titthahi

'
!

Sunatu

me

bhante sangho

Ndgo dyasmato

Tissassa upa-

sampadapekho.
auusaseyyam. Sunasi Ndga
tarn
!

Yadi sanghassa pattakallam, aham Ndgam

ayan te paccakalo bhutakalo. Yam jatam, santam atthiti vattabbam, sanghamajjhe pucchante asantam natthiti vattabbam. Ma kho vitthiisi ma kho manku ahosi
: !

Evam tam

pucchissan Santi te evarupa abadhii ? * Kuttham ? ' " Natthi bhante." * Gando r " Natthi bhante." ' * " Natthi Kilaso ?

ti.

bhante."

*So8o?'
*

"

Apamiiro

Natthi bhante." " Natthi bhante." ?

'

142
*

UPASAMPADA KAMMAVACA.
si P'
'

'

'

'

Ama bbante." Ama bhante." " Ama bhante." Bhujisso* si P " Ama bhante." Anano' si P " Ama bhante." Na' si rajabhato P " Ama bhante." Anuuiiato' si matapituhi ?* " Ama bhante." Paripunna-visati- vasso 'si P " Ama bhante." Paripunnan te patta-clvaram P' " Aham bhante Nago nama." Kinnamo 'si P'
Manusso'
Puriso'
si P

"

"

*Ko namo te upajjhayo Tiasathero nama."

Sunatu

P'

"Upajjhayo me bhante aijasmd

me

bhante

upasampadjipekho.

Ndgo sangho Anusittho so maya.

! :

di/asmato

Tissassa

Yadi sanghassa pattakallam, Ndgo agaccheyya.

Agacchahiti vattabbo Sangham bhante upasampadam yiicami bhante sangho, anukampam upadiiya
! :

UUumpatu mam
:

Dutiyam pi bhante sangham upasampadam yacami Ullumpatu mam bhante sangho, anukampain upadaya Tatiyara pi bhante sangham upasampadam yacami Ullum!

patu mam

bhante sangho,

anukampam upadaya
!

Sunatu

me

bhante sangho

ayam Ndgo dyasmato

:

Tissassa

upasampadjipekho. Yadi sanghassa pattakallam aham Ndgam antariiyike dhamme puccheyyam Sunasi Ndga ! ayan te saccakalo bhiitakiilo. Yam jatam Santam atthiti vattabbam, asantam uatthiti tarn pucchami
:

vattabbam.
Santi te evarOpa abadha ' " Natthi bhante." ' P
:

Kutthain

Gando

P'
'

'

Kilaso P

" Natthi bhante." " Natthi bhante." " Natthi bhante." ' " Natthi bhante." P
si P
'
'

'SosoP'
* *

Apamaro
Puriso'
si

Manusso'

P
si P
*

"

Bhujisso'
*

Anano'

si

Ama bhante." Ama bhante." " Ama bhante.* " Ama bhante."

"

UPASAMPADA KAMMAVACA.
" Ama bhante." rajabhato ? * " Ama bhante." Anuilimto' si miitapituhi ? ' " Ama bhante." * Paripunna-vlsati-vasso' si ? ' " Ama bhante." * Paripunnan te pattacivarara ?
*

143

Na*

'

si

Kinnumo'

'

si ?

"

Aham
'

'

Ko namo te

upajjhayo

bhante Ndgo nama." " Upaj jhayo me bhante dyasmd

Tismtthero nama."

Sunatu

me

bhante sangho

Ayam Ndgo ayasmato

Tissassa

upasampadapekho, parisuddho antarayikehi dhammehi, paripunn' assa patta-clvaram Ndgo sangham upasampadam yacati dyasmatd Tissena upajjhayena. Yadi sanghassa pattakallani sangho Ndgam upasampadeyya
dyasmatd Tissena upajjhayena. Esd Natti :

Sunatu
Tissassa

sangho ! Ayam Nago ayasmato upasampadapekho parisuddho antarayikehi dhamassa pattaclvaram Niigo

me

bhante

mehi paripunn'

dam

yacati ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena.

sangham upasampaSangho Niigam.

upasampadeti ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena. Yassayasmato khamati Nagassa upasampada ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena, Yassa na kkhamati, so bhaseyya. 80 tunh' assa. Dutiyam pi etam attham vadami
:

ayam Nago ayasmato Tissassa upasampadapekho parisuddho antarayikehi dhammehi paripunn' assa pattacivarara Nago sangham upasampadam yacati
!

Sunatu

me

bhante sangho

ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena.

deti

Sangho Nagani upasampaayasmata Tissena upajjhayena. Yassayasmato khamati Nagassa upasampada ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena, so tunh' Yassa na kkhamati, so bhaseyya. assa. Tatiyam pi etam attham vadami.

ayam Niigo ayasmato Tissassa upasampadapekho parisuddho antarayikehi dhammehi paripun^* assa pattaclvaram Nago sangham upasampadam yacati
!

Sunatu

me

bhante sangho

ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena. Sangho Nagara upasampaayasmata Tissena upajjhayena. Yassayasmato khamati Nagassa upasampada ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena, so tunh' assa. Yassa na kkhamati so bhaseyya.
deti

144

UPASAMPADA KAMMAVACA.

Upasarapanno sarighena Niigo ayasmatii Tissena upajjhiitasmu tunhi evam etain dhurayena khamati saughassa
:
:

yainiti.

Tiivadeva

chiiyji

metabbii

Utupamiinam iicikkhitabbam
Divasabhjlgo iicikkhitabbo Sahgiti ucikkbitabba.
;

Cattiiro nissayii ucikkbitabba

Cattari ca akaranlyani acikkhitabbani

Phidiydlopahhojanam nissdya pahhajjd : tattha te yavaAtirekalilbho Sangbabhattam, jlvam ussabo karanlyo. uddesabbattam, nimantanam, salakabbattam, pakkbikam, " " Ama bbante " " uposatbikara, patipadikam." " Pamsiikulaclvaram nissdya 2)abbaJ/d : tattha te yava2) ussabo Atirekalilbho khomam, kappiisikaranlyo. jlvam " " Ama kam, koseyyam, kambalara, sanara, bhaiigam."
1)
:

"

bhante."" *' Rukkhamulasendsanam 3)

yavajivain ussabo karanlyo.

nissdya

pahhajjd
:

tattha

te

Atirekalabho viharo addha" " Ama bbante " " hammiyam, guba." yogo, pasiido, " Putimuttabhesajjam nissdya pahhajjd tattha te yava4) Atirekalabho ussabo Sappi, navanitam, karanlyo. jlvam " " Ama bhante " " telam, madbu, phanitam."
!
: :

"
1)

Upasampannena hhikkhund methimo dhanimo na patisevi-

Yo bhikkhu methunam iabho antamaso tiracchdnagatdya pi. dhammam patisevati assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo. Seyyathiipi

niima

Puriso sisacchinno abhabbo tena sarirabandba-

nena

jivitura,

sevitva assamano boti "" akaranlyani."

evam eva bhikkhu methunam dhammam patiTan te yavajivam asakyaputtiyo.

Ama

bhante

" "

Upasampannena hhikkhund adinnam theyyasahkhdtam na addtahham antamaso tinasaldkam updddya, Yo bhikkhu pjidam vii padarabam vii atirekapjidam va adinnam theyya2)

"

sahkhatam
:

adiyati,

assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo. Seyyathlipi

nama Pandupaliiso bandhana pamutto abhabbo haritattSya evam eva bhikkhu padam va padarabam va atirekapadam va

TICIVARENA AVIPPAVASA.
adinnam theyyasankhutam

145

adiyitva, assamano hoti asakya-

Tan puttiyo. bhante!""

"
3)

te

yavajlvam

akaranlyam."

**

"

Ama

Upasampannena hhikkhuna

sanclcca pdnojlvitcL
:

na voro-

petabbo antamaso
sailcicca

kHnthakipillikam updddya raanussaviggaham jlvitii voropeti antamaso gabbhapatanam upadiiya assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo, Seyyathapi nama puthu sila dvedha bhinna appatisandhika hoti, evam eva bhikkhu sancicca manussaviggaham jivita voropetva assamano
hoti, asakyaputtiyo.

Yo bhikkhu

Tan

te

yavajlvam akaranlyam."

" "Ama

bhante.""
uUapitabbo antamaso simndgdre abhirdmiti.

Upasampannena bhikkhund uttari-manussa-dhammo na Yo bhikkhu papiccho icchapakato asantam abhutam uttari-manussa-dhammam uUapati jhanara va vimokkharn va samadhim va samapattim vji maggam va phalara va assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo. Seyyathapi nama talo matthaka chinno, abhabbo puna virulhaya evam eva bhikkhu papiccho icchapakato asantam abhutam uttari-manussa-dhammam ullapitva, assamano hoti
4)
:

"

asakyaputtiyo.

Tan

te

yavajlvam akaranlyam."

""

Ama

bhante.""

Chap.

II.

THE INVESTITURE OF A PRIEST WITH THE THREE ROBES.

bhante sangho. Yo so sanghena ticivarena sammato. Yadi sahghassa pattakallara sangho avippavaso tarn ticivarena avippavasam samuhaneyya.

Sunatu

me

Esd

natti

bhante sangho Yo so sanghena ticivarena tam ticivarena avippavasam avippavaso sammato, sangho samuhanati. Yass4yasmato khamati etassa ticivarena avippa-

Sunatu

me

10

146

XJPOSATHA KAMMAVACA.
Yassa na kkhamati so
avippaviiso.

vasassa samugghato, so tunh* assa.

bhasej'ya.

Samiihato so sanghena ticlvarena

tui'ibl

Kliamati sahghassa tasmii

evam etam dbarayamiti.

Chap. III.

THE FIXING OF A BOUNDAUY FOR THE PERFORMANCE OF THE UPOSATHA.

me bhante sangbo Yii sa sangbena sima sammasamiinasamvasa ek' uposatba yadi sangbassa pattakallam sangbo tam simam samuhaneyya.
SunJitu
!

nnitii

Esd mtti:
Suniltu rae bbante sangbo
banati.
sjiya
!

yii

sa

sangbena sTma saramasimaya samanasamva-

nnita samanasamvasii ek' uposathii, sangbo tam sImam samii-

Yassayasmato kbamati

etissii

Yassa na ek' uposatbaya samuggbato so tunb' assa. kkbamati, so bbiiseyya. Samubatii sa slmii sangbena samanasaraviisa ek' uposathii.

Kbamati sangbassa
?'

tasmii tunbl

evam
!

etam
* *

dhiirayiimiti.

Purattbimiiya disiiya kin nimittara

" Piisiino bbante "

'

Eso

piisiino

nimittam

'
!

Purattbimiiya
'

anudisiiya
*
!

kin

nimittam

" Pasiino

bbante!" Eso piisiino nimittam

* *

Dakkhiniij^a disiiya kin nimittara ?

"

Piisiino

bbante

"
!

Eso

piisiino

nimittam

' !

Dukkbiniiya anudisiiya kin nimittam?' "Piisiino bbante!" Eso piisiino nimittam * " Pasiino bbante " Paccbimiiya disiiya kin nimittara ?' * Eso piisiino nimittam
*
* !
!

'

*
*

Paccbimiiya anudisiiya kin nimittam Eso piisiino nimittam

'
!

?'

"Piisiino bbante !"

'

Uttariiya disiiya kin nimittara ?'

*'

Piisiino

bbante

"
!

Eso

piisiino

nimittam

'
!

KATHINA KAMMAVACA.
'TJttariiya anudisiiya kin
* '
!

147

nimittam?*

"

Pasano bhante

!'*

Eso pasano nimittam SunJitu me bhante sangho

kittitii
:

YuvatJi samanta

nimitta

yadi sanghassa pattakallam sangho etehi nimittehi

ek' uposatham.
:

simam sammanneyya samuna-samvasam

JEsd

mtti

Suniitu me bhante sangho Yavata samanta nimitta kittita sangho etehi nimittehi sImam sammannati samanasamvasam ek' uposatham. Yassayasmato khamati etehi nimittehi slsammuti raaya samana-samvasaya ek' uposathjiya, so tunh' assa Yassa na kkhamati so bhaseyya Sammata sa sima etehi nimittehi samanasamviisa ek' sanghena uposatha. Khamati sanghassa tasma tunhl evam etam dharayamiti.
! ! !

Sunatu me bhante sangho Ya sa sanghena sammata saYadi sanghassa pattakallam manasamvasa ek' uposatha sangho tam sImam ticivarena avippavasam sammaneyya thapetva gamanca gamupacaranca. End fiatti : Sunatu me bhante sangho Ya sa sanghena sIma sammata samanasamvasa ek' uposatha sangho tam sImam ticivarena avippavasam sammannati thapetva gamanca gamupacaraiica. Yassayasmato khamati etissa simaya ticivarena avippavasaya sammuti thapetva gamanca gamupacarafica, so tunh* assa yassa na kkhamati so bhaseyya.
!
:

Sammata

sa sIma

gamanca gamupacaranca. evam etam dharayamiti.

sanghena ticivarena avippavasii thapetva Khamati sanghassa tasma tunhi

Chap. IV.

THE BESTOWMENT OF THE KAJHINA ROBE.

Sunatu me bhante sangho Idam sanghassa kathinadussam uppannain. Yadi sanghassa pattakallam, sangho imam kathinadussam itthannamassa bhikkhuno dadoyya kathinam attharitum.
!

148

KATHINA KAMMAVACA.

JEsd mtiL Sunatu me bhante sangho Idam sanghassa kathinadussam uppannam. Sangho imam kuthinadussam itthannamassa bhikkhuno deli kuthinam attharitum. Yass&yasmato khamati iraassa kathinadussassa itthannamassa bhikkhuno dilnam kathinam attharitum so tunh' assa. Yassa na kkhamati 80 bhaseyj'a. Dinnam idam sahghena kathinadussam itthannamassa bhikkhuno kathinam attharitum. Khamati tasma etam evam tunhi, sanghassa, dharayamlti.
!

Kathinadayakassa vattham atthi sace so tarn ajananto " Bhante katham kathinam djitabban ti ? " pucchati
:

Tinnam civaranam ailfiatara-pahonakam suriyuggamana-samaye vattham kathinacl:

Tassa evam acikkhitabbam

" "

varam demii
attharitu

ti diitum vattatiti " " Attharakena bhikkhuna

sace

sanghatiya

kathinam
:

paccuddharitabba nava sanghati adhitthatabba, "imiiya sanghatiya kathinain Tena kathinattharakena attharamiti," vaca bhinditabbii.
hoti,

kamo

poranika sahghjiti

bhikkhuna sahgham upasahkamitva ekamsam uttarasangam karitva afijalim paggahetva evam assa vacanlyo " Atthatara, bhante, sanghassa kathinam dhammiko kathi" nattharo, anumodatha " " Atthatam avuso sanghassa kathinam dhammiko kathi:

nattharo

anumodama

ti

""

me bhante sangho kathinam sangho uddhareyya.

SunJitu

Yadi sanghassa pattakallam

Ead

hatii

:
!

Yadi sanghassa pattakallam Sunatu me bhante sangho sangho kathinam uddharati. Yassayasmato khamati kathinassa ubbharo so tunh' assa yassa na kkhamati, so bha!

seyya.

Ubbhatam sahghena kathinam

tunbi evam etam dharayamiti.

Khamati sanghassa tasma

THERA-SAMMUTI-NAMASAMMUTTI.
Chap. V.

149

THE ELECTION OF A
Aham
soham,
yacarai
!

PRIEST.
!

bhante itthannamam
bhante,

sangham Dutiyam pi yacapetva, tatiyam pi yacapetva byattena bhikkhuna patibalena sarigho iiapetabbo Sunatu me bhante sangho ayam itthannatno bhikkha sangham itthannamam therasammutirn yacati. Yadi sanghassa pattakallam sangho itthannamassa bhikkhuno itthan: !

thera-sammutim iccharai itthannamam therasammutirn

namam
Esd

therasammutirn dadeyya.
:
!

natti

bhante sangho Ayam itthannamo bhikkhu sangham itthannamam therasammutirn yacati, sangho itthannamassa bhikkhuno itthannamam therasammutirn deti. YasslLyasmato khamati itthannamassa bhikkhuno itthannamam therasammutiya danam, so tunh' assa. Yassa na kkhamati so bhaseyya. Dinna sanghena itthannamassa bhikkhuno itthannamam therasammuti khamati sanghassa tasma tunhi evam etam dharayamiti.

Sunatu

me

Chap. YI.

THE GIYING OF A NAME TO A PRIEST.

Aham bhante itthannamam namasammutim icehami, soham
bhante

sangham

itthannamam namasammutim
:

yacamiti.

Dutiyam pi yacapetva tatiyam pi yacapetva byattena bhikkhuna patibalena sangho napetabbo Sunatu me bhante sangho Ayam itthannamo bhikkhu sangham itthannamam namasammutim j'acati. Yadi sanghassa pattakallam sangho itthannamassa bhikkhuno itthanoamam
!

namasammutim dadeyya.
End
natti
:

150

VIHARA KAMMAVACA.

sangbam

A^-am itthannamo bbikkhu itthannamam namasamrautim yacati sahgbo itthannamassa bhikkbuno ittbanniimam namasammutim deti. Yassfiyaamato khamati ittbannamassa bliikkbuno ittbannamam niima sammutiya danam so tunb' asaa Yassa na kkba!
: !

Sunatu

me bhante sangho

mati so bhiiseyya.

Dinna sahgbena ittbannamassa bbikkbuno ittbanniimam nilmasammuti Kbamati sangbassa tasma tui^bi evam etam
:

dbiirayamiti.

Evam kammavacam
databbo
ti.

katva byattena bbikkbuna patibalena

Chap. VII.

THE DEDICATION OF A YIHARA.

Sunatu me bbante sangbo Yadi sangbassa pattakallara sahgbo ittbannamam vibaram kappiyabbumim sammanneyya.
;

Esd

natti

ram kappiyabbumim sammannati.

:

Sangbo ittbannamam vibaYass&yasmato kbamati ittbannamassa vibarassa kappiya bbumiyii sammuti so tunb* assa Yassa na kkbamati so bbaseyya. Sammato sahgbena itthannamo vibiiro kappiyabbumi. Kbamati sangbassa tasma tunbi evam etam dbiirayamiti.
Sunatu
bbante sangbo
!

me

HANDBOOK OF
III.

PALI.

GLOSSARY.

GLOSSARY.
ajjhattarh (adv.), relating to the in-

A, aud before vowels AN, a negative

particle
tion.
;

dividual.

used only in composi-

ajjhattiko (adj.), internal, belonging

to the individual.

AMSO, a part, a period of time. AMSO, AMSAM, shoulder.

a-kattho
(adj.),

AJJHAYAKO, ANJALI (m.),

joined hands.

a preceptor. the hollow of the

not ploughed.

a-kano, rice freed from the red coat-

annataro, one, a certain.

ing which underlies the husks. a-kanto (adj.), unpleasant, disagreeable.

tt-kaliko (adj.), without delay (epi-

ANNA (f.) knowledge.

anhatra (adv.), otherwise, with the
exception
of.

thet of the

dhamma), immediate.
firm, immoveable.

ANNO, other. ATTO, a case,

atthahgiko

a cause.

a-kuppo

(adj.),

ATTHA (num.), eight.

(adj.), eightfold.

a-kusalo (adj.), had, evil, sinful. a-kkuddho (adj.), not violent.

atthamo, eighth.

akkha-dhutto, gambler. akkhata (m.), one who tells.

a-kkhati, to
tell.

ATTHI

(n.),

bone; caus. atthiyati,

to treat as a bone.

ATTHI'^"NJA

(f.),

marrow.

AKKHO, AGGAM,
AGGI

die.

ATTHO,
anuko
foremost.
share, quality, at-

reason.
t.),

point, top, extremity.

fire.

APPHAYOGO (t.
ANNAVO,
ATI

large hall.

(m.),

(adj.), very small.

AGGO

(adj.), first,

the sea, the ocean.

prep.), over, beyond,

ANGAM,
tribute.

limb

(adv. and

exceeding, before vowels ace.

acceti,

to
;

pass beyond,

to

over-

ati-go (adj.), escaping from.

come

p. p. p. atito, past.

[gant. ati-mannati, to despise, to be arro-

AJJA

(adv.),

now, to-day.
.

ati-mant

(adj.),

proud.
(t.
t.),

ajjatagge, henceforward

ATIREKALABHO
allowance.

extra

AJJHAITAM,

individual thought.

151

GLOSSARY.
(n.), self,

ATTA

mind

(for declen-

an-abhirati, dissatisfaction.

sion, see

Grammar).
[arice.

an-arahd, not being a saint.

an-ariyo, ignoble.

A'lTHA

(adv.), here.

ATTIIAM

(Skr. tuta), disappear-

anavajjata

(f.),

blamelessness.

att/ia-gamo, atthan, disappearance,

annihilation.
a-ttharati, to spread out.

anavajjo (adj.), blameless.

an-avayho

(adj.),

not to be given in

marriage.
an-avaseso, without remainder.
an-avilo, clear from.

atthdya (adv.), for the good of. AT'l'HI, to he (for conjugation, see

Grammar).

andkulo, untroubled.
;

ATTHO, reason, desire property. ATHA, ATHO (adv.), and hut.

;

andgato, future, coming.

[less.

andlayo, free from desire, passion-

a-thuso

(adj.), free

from husk.
is

A-NICCO
not

(adj.)

(t. t.),

perishable,

a-dlnnaddnaih, taking what

given.

not lasting. anittho (adj.), unpleasant.

ADDHANAM, a road

a long time.

ANU

(adv.

and

prep.), after, later

ADHAMO (adj.),

lowest.

along, again, in consequence.

AD HI (adv. and prep.), above, over;

frequently in composition before

anu-kat/^ati, to recite.

anu-kampako, compassionate.
anu-kampl, compassionate.
anu-jdndti, to permit
nato.
;

vowels ajjh.
adhi-titthati, to devote oneself.

p. p. p.

anuh-

adhi-tthanam, resting-place.

ADHI-PATI
blidsi.

(m.), lord, chief.

;

ati'Utthdnam, want of energy.

anu-tthitati, to

adhi-bhdsati, to address

aor. ajjha-

make

to follow.
is

an-uttaro

(adj.),

than which none

adhi-vahanath, carrying.

higher, the highest.

[accept.
anudisd,
(f.),

adhi-vdsanam, the assent,

adhi-vdseti (cans.),
to

an intermediate point

consent, to

of the compass.

a-nano, free from debt.

an-attd (m.), not a
an-atto
(adj.),
self.

an-up-pagacchati, not to embrace.

anu-para-yati, to walk round and
individu-

without

round.
anu-passi (adj.), looking at, contemplating.

ality, unreal.

an-attha-samhito, profitless.

an-anu-giddho, without greediness.

un-anu-s8uto
(adj.),

anu-pubbaso

(adv.), in regular order.

unheard

of.

anuppanno, not arisen.

an-uppddo, not arising.
anu-ydti, to follow.

an-anto, without end, innumerable.

ANA-BHAVO,
bhdvarh

non-existence; anato

gacchatl,

come

to

anu-yogo, being addicted

to.

nothing, to perish.

anu-rakkhati, to protect.

GL088ART.

156
(part.), also, even.
(adj.),

ANU-8AY0
anusari

(t. t.),

repentance.

APf, PI
a-pUuno
ap-eti, to

(adj.), fullowing;.

not calumnious.

anu-gdsati, to teach.

go away.

anu-ssarati, to call in mind.

appa-kicco, having few cares.

a-pjHigabbho, not arrogant.
a-ppati-sandiko,
united.

anu-asaveti (cans.), to cause to be

heard, to proclaim.
an-ejo (adj.), free

that

cannot

be

from desire.

ANTAM, ANTAGUNAM,
antamaso, even.

an-ottapi (adj.), fearless of sinning. the intestines, bowels.

appa-nigghoso, free from noise.

a-ppa-matto, vigilant, careful.

mesentery.

O'ppamdno

(adj.), infinite.

a-ppo'Ttiddo, vigilance, zeal.

ANTARA

(adv.

and

prep.), within,

appa-saddo, free from noise.

a-ppu-tanno, dissatisfied.
a-ppiyo, not dear, hateful.

between, among.

antara-dhanam, disappearance.
antara-dhayati, to vanish, to hide
p. p. p. antarahito, vanished.
;

APPO

(adj.),

small,

weak

fre-

quently in composition.

antardyiko, causing an obstacle.

abbh-ug-gacchati, to reach.

[sire.

ANTARA- VASAKO
garment worn by
priest.

(t. t.),

under-

A-BY-APADO (t.t.), absence

a-bhabbatd a-bhabbo
(f.),

of de-

Buddhist

non-liability.

(adj.), incapable.

ANTALIKKHAM,
ANTIMO,

sky, air.

last, final.

a-bhayam, safety from danger. ABHI (adv. and prep.), exceeding;

in, into.

ANTO

(adv.
;

and

prep.), within, in,

inside

see also antara,

limit.

abhi-kkanto, handsome, beautiful.

ANTO (also neuter), end, ANDHO (adj.), blind.

andha-koro, darkness.

abhl-kkanto

(p. p. p.),

abhikkamati,

advanced.
abhi-kkamati, to step forward.

ANNAM, food. APAMARO, epilepsy.

a-pamuttho
(adj.),

abhi-kkamo, advancing.
abhi-gtto, (p. p. p.), recited.
left

not

behind.

nbhijdndti, to

know
(f.),

g^r. abhinnd.

a-pardjito, unconquered.

ABHIJJHA

covetousness.

a-parimdno
fined.

(adj.),

immense, unde-

abhi-t'ttthati, to surpass.

ABHITTHANAM
d'adly
sin.

(t.

t.),

crime,

a-pariydddnarh, not taking up, not laying hold of.

ABHINHAM

(adv.), repeatedly.

APARO

(adj.), other,

subsequent;

abhinhato (adv.), repeatedly, [with.

ab/ii-nandati, to rejoice, to
l>e

western.

pleased
re-

a-pddako, having no

feet.

ABHINIBBATTI

(f.)

(t.t.),

APAYO

[going away],

hell.

birth ia another existence.

IM
abhi-niveno, adhering to.
abhi-paleti, to

GLOSSARY.
avecca, gerund, of ava
penetrate.

yj

i,

to

guard, to keep.
rejoicing.

abhi-ppa-modayam,

a-veram, fricudliuess.

abhi-ramati, to delight.
abhi-rudo, cooing, singing.
abhi-ruhati, to

a-anto

(adj.),

not good, wicked.

a-ammoho
tion.

(adj.),

without infatua-

mount.

abhi-vastati, to cause to rain.

a-sallino, not cowering, resolute.

abhi-vadeti, caus. of abhivadati, to

salute.

ASlTI

(num.), eighty.
tliis,

ASU

(pron.),
;

that (see

Gram-

ah/ii-sameti, to penetrate.

mar)
a-$ubho

amumhi

(loc.), here.

a-bhojaneyyo, not to be eaten.

a-suci (adj.), unclean.

(adj.),

a-mato

(adj.),

immortal.
uupleasing,

bad.

a-inanapo
pleasant.

(adj.),

un-

ASURO,

an asura.
;

a-aeso (adj.), without rest

(adj.),

all,

every.

a-manoramo

unpleasant.

a-so/co, free

from sorrow.
[ness.

a-mitto, enemy.

ASNATI,
(m.), a vener-

to eat.
;

ARANNAM,

forest.

asiddo, tasting

enjoyment, happi-

ARAHA ARAHAM
able person.

a-ssasati, to inhale air.

ASSO,
worth.
honourable, vener-

horse.
I (see

ARAHO
ARIYO

(adj.),

AHAM (pron.),

Grammar).

(adj.),

able, noble.

AH I (m.), a snake. AHO (interjection).

ARIYA-SACCAM
truth.

(t. t.),

sublime

ALAM (adv.),
ALASO
ALOKO,
alltko

sufficient.

A (prep.),

until, as far as.

(adj.), idle.

a-kankhati, to desire.
a-kapjM, ornament, disguise.
d-gacchatiy to come.
a-cikkhati, to
investigate.
tell,

intuition.

alliyati, to

be attached, to adhere.

(adj.),

being

addicted,

ad-

to

announce, to

hering.

AVA
off;

and

(prep,

and

adv.), away,

ajahno
d-jtvo,

(adj.),

down.

livelihood,

of noble birth, [hood. means of liveli-

ava-jdndti, to despise.

ava-ruddho

(adj.),

obstructed.

ATAPO, sunshine. ATAPI (adj.), ardent,

a-ddti, to take
;

zealous.

a-viddasu, ignorant.
a-vippavato, not parting.
a-vi-rufho (adj.), not grown.

pass, ddiyati.

ADICCO,

the sun.
distress,

AdINAVO,
evil result.

suffering

a-vivayho
avihimaa

(adj.),

not marriageable.

(f.),

mercy, humanity.

dnantariko (adj.), uninterrupted.

0L08SART.

W7
food.
offering.
(adj.),
sacrificial,

AxAPAXAIVr
exhaled

(t.

t.),

inlniled

and

AhARO,
a-huti
(f.),

lireath.

ANISAMSO,

advjintage, profit.

ahuneyyo
shipful,

wor-

aiiub/iavava(At\j.), possessing

power.

worthy of

offerings.

anu-bhavo, power, dignity.

a-net't, to I)ring

home.

apadeta (m.), inflioter, causer. abadhiko (adj.), affected with illness.

INGHA

(interj.),

come

pray

ABADHO,

illness.

a-b/iujati, to

bend, to turn.

ICCHATI. to wish. ICCHA, wish, desire, INJATI, to move, to

lust.

be shaken.
[sant.

AMA

(interj.), yes, truly.

INAM,

debt.
(adj.), desired,

a-manteti, to address.

A YATANAM (t.
a-t/atiko, future.

[sphere. t.), organs of sense ;

ITTHO
ITI,

good, plea-

TI

(conj.), thus.

ITTHATTAM,

present condition.

AYASMA,
AYASO,

old, venerable.

despair.

itthan-namo, having such and such a name, thus named.

AYU

(n.), life.

ITTH I
see

(f.),

woman

(for declension,

a-yuto

(adj.),

endowed with.

Grammar).
(f.)
(t.

a-raddho

(p. p. p. to aradhaii), ac-

IDDHI

t.),

supernatural

complished.
a-rahhati,
to

begin,

to

attempt,
;

power. iddhiko (adj.), possessed of iddhi

(supernatural power). iddhimd, possessed of supernatural

to exert oneself;
p. p. p.

ger. arabbha

araddho.

AR AMO, pleasure, pleasure-garden.

a-ruhati, to ascend.

power.
(adv.), here, hither. [gwte. indakhllo, pillar in front of a city

IDHA

a-varanam, covering.
avaso, abode.

INDO,

king, chief.
(t. t.),
;

avahati, to convey.

INDRIYO

faculty.

AVI

(adv.), manifestly, in full view

(see

Grammar).
(voc. to ai/asmd), friend!
seat.
(t.

maheai (idem). iaaariyam, dominion.

ISI, a priest

a-Duati, to enter, to approach.

ISSARO,

master, chief.

AVUSO
A-SAVO
human

ISSA, jealousy, envy,

I.

asanam, a

t), literally influence;

;

passion

khtnasavo, one in

Is A, pole of a plough.

whom human passiou is extinct. ASEVi (adj.), addicted to. Aha, to 8|ieak (see (jrammar).
ahanati, to strike.

U.
uk-kujjeti, to set

up again.

Hg-gacchati, to

rise.

158
ug-gafihati, to rise, to
learn.
lift

GLOSSARY.
np, to

upa-jwati, to subsist by.

upajj hdpeti, to command.

rise.

ug-gamanath,

UPAJJHO,
part qf

preceptor.

UGGO,

violent.
(indecl.),

upa-tthanam, attendance.
as Jirst
;

UCCA
high

upa-tthito (p. p.p.), ready, present.

compounds high
seat.

uccdsayanath,

upaddho,

half, partial.

upa-dissati, to be seen, discovered.

UC-CARO,

excrement.
straight.

UPADHI
being.

(t.

t.),

a substratum of

UJU (adj.),

uj-jhayati, to be irritated, annoyed.

upandmfiti (cans.), to

offer.

u-tthahati, to rise, to stand up, to

UPA-NAHl

(adj.),

bearing hatred.

exert oneself; p. p. p. vutthito.

upa-ni-pajjati, to

lie

down.
to.

UNNA-NABHI UNHAM, heat.

(m.), spider.

upanissdya, near, close

upa-nisso, residing in.

UNHO

(adj.), hot.

upa-pajjati, to

come

to, to attain.

UIjARO

(adj.),
f.

mighty, great.
season.

upamo, highest.
uparimo
(adj.),

UTU (m. UTTAMO

n.),

[most.
highest,
ut-

uppermost.
to ap-

(superl.),

upa-vadati, to blame.

UTTARA-SANGO,

tlie upper yellow garment of a Buddhist priest.

upa-san-kamati, to go
proach.

to,

UTTARO (adj.), higiier;

UTTANO,
clear,

northern.

upa-samo, quietude, calm.

supine
;

open, evident,
uttdni

UPASAMPADA (f.)
sampada
nation.

(t. t.),

the upa-

easy

adv.

and

ordination.
for ordi-

uttdnd, clearly.
ut-trasati, to tremble.

upasampaddpekho, wishing

UD

(prep., only used in composi-

UPADANAftl

(t.

t.),

clinging to
;

tion), above,

away

outside, out.

existence, attachment

okhandhdf

UDAKAM, water. UDARAM, belly.

udariyam, stomach. UDANAM, solemn utterance.
uddneti (cans.), to breathe forth.
ud-eti, to

element of being.
upd-diyati, to take hold
;

anukam-

path updddya, taking pity.

updydso, despair.

come up.
upwards.
;

UPAYO, means of success. UPASAKO, fem. UPASIKA (t.

a lay devotee.

t.),

UDDHAM,
UPA
(adv.

ud-dharati, to draw out

to

lift

up.
to
;

UPEKHA
nimity.

(f.),

indifference, equa-

and prep

),

near

below,

less.
;

npekkhako,

resigfned, patient.

upa-cdro, approach

gamupacdro,

up-eti, to go, to

approach

pd^u-

the approach to a village.

peto, living, possessed of breath.

OLOSSART.

159

UPOSATHIKAlCf

(t.

t.),

food

o-pildpeti, to let float.

offered on full-moon days.

o-bhasati, to shine.

UPOSATHO

(t.

t.),

the Buddhist

o-bhaso, light.

Sabbnth-day.
vp-pajjati, to arise.

o-hito (p. p. p.), put

down, deposited.

uppanno,

p. p. p. to uppajati.
(t. t.),

K.

UBBHARO=UDDHARO
rooting up.

KAIVfSO, metal, bronze.

ul-lapati, to lay claim to, to assert.

KANKHATI, to doubt. KACCHURO, scab.

ul-lumpati, to

lift

up.

KATHINAM
for

(t.

t.),

a robe made
in a single

ul-loketi, to look up.

a Buddhist priest

ussaho, exertion.

day, out of the rough material.

K AT HI NO
E.

(adj.),

hard, solid.

KANDU
KANNO,

(f.),

itch.

ekaggo

(adj.),

calm, tranquil.

ear.
(adj.),

eha-cco (adj.), one, a certain.

KANHO

black, sinful.

eka-m-antam

EKO EKO (adj.), single, solitary. EKODIBHAVO (t. t.), unity,

haps 'predominance.' etarahi (adv.), now.
etadiso, such like.

(adv.), on one (num.), one ; alone.

side.

katapuhnatd, meritorlousness.

per-

KATAMO (pron.), what ? KATHAM (adv.), how. KATHA discourse.

(f.),

which

kad-ariyo, a bad man.

KANTO

(a(^j.),

loved, agreeable.

ETI,

to go, to enter (with ace).

KAPPASIKAM, cotton. KAPPIYO (adj.), fit, right, proper;

kappiyabhumi, a suitable
site.

EVA and EVAM (adv.), thus. ESANA (f.), wish, desire.

ESl
(adj.),

KAPPETI
arrange.

(cans.), to enter upon, to

seeking, desiring.

ehi-passiko (adj.), inviting (epithet

KAPPO, time;
the whole
;

rule; ordinance; all,

of the

dhamma).
O.

KAMPATI,
o-kaso,

kevalakappo, whole. to shake.

room, place.
({.),

KAMBAKAM, woollen garment. KAMMAM, doing, action.

kammanta
kammanto,
work,
(f.),

O'kkanti

descent.

calling.
;

OGHO,

flood, torrent.

conduct

occupntiuu,

opanayiko,

leading to perfection (epithet of the dhamma).

kamma-vipako, result of actions.

otthdvo (adj.), steady.

kamyata

({.),

desire.

ODATO,

white, pure.

opako, without result.

KARAI^AM, making. KARlSAM, excrement.

100

GLOSSARY.
compassion.
(see

KARUIVA.

(f.),

KULAIVI,
kulaputto,

flock,

herd
of

family.

KAROTI,

to

make
to

Grammar);
;

son

noble

family

mantuikaroti,
kalaiikaroti,

piiy attention

high

caste.

to

die

anjalim

KULlRAKO,

a crab.
(t. t.),

karoti, to salute respectfully.

KALEBARAM, a corpse. K AS ATI, to plough.

kasi,

KUSALO (adj.) KCLAM, rag.

KEVALl
(m.)

skilful.

(t.t.),

[complished. one who is ac-

ploughing.

KEVALO
KESO,
lust, pasgion.
;

(adj.),

whole, entire.

kassako, a ploughman.

hair.

KAMO, wish, KAYO, body.

kayiko

desire

KO

(inter,

pron.),

who ? which

what ?

(see

Grammar).

(adj.), bodily, physical.

koci, whosoever.

KARl (adj.), doing, acting. KARO, making, constituent

kalakiriyd
(f.),

KOST.A, heron.
part.

KODHO,

anger.

death.

kovido, knowing, acquainted with.

KALO,

time; kalena, in due time;

KOPlNAM,

pudenda.
silken stuff.

bhattakalo, meal-time.

KOSEYYAM,
it

kdlam mahhati, he deems

right.

KASO, a cough. -KIM (adv.), why, pray?

khhsu, what.

KH.
what.

KHANO, moment
of time).

(brief

measure

kihci[d), anything, whatsoever.

khandiccam,

state of

being broken.

KINCIKKHAM,

trifle.

KHATTIYO,

warrior.

KITTAYATI, kitteti, KITTI (f.), fame.

KIPILLIKO, an
ant.

to proclaim.

KHANTi (f.), patience. KHANDO, the shoulders

ment of being.

1. 1.

ele-

KILAMATHO,
KILASO,

[tion. fatigue, mortifica-

KHAMATI, to

endure

to forgive

scab, dry leprosy.

to be approved.

KiRAM, meat. KlVA (adv.), how?

KHAYO, KHARO,

extinction, vanishing.

solid; harsh.
(f.),

KUKUCCAM, misconduct. KUKUTTHAKO, Phasiunus

lus,

KHASA
gal-

scab.

a bird.
belly.

KHIPATI, to throw. KHIYATI, to decrease,

away;
to

to

waste

KUCCHI(f.),

murmur;

p. p. p. khijio.

KU^JARO,

elephant.

KHILO,

a pin, a stake.
(adj.),

KUTTHAM, leprosy. KUNTHO, an ant. KUMARO, hoy.

kumari
((.),

KHUDDO
KHURO,

mean.

hoof of a horse or ox.

girl.

KHELO, saliva, phlegm. KHETTAld, land, district.

GLOSSARY.

161
rock-cave.

KHEMAI!^,

safety,

well-being

GUHA
GO
(m.

(f.),

yogakkhemam, nibbana.

GEDHO,
(adj.),

greediness.
ox,

KHEMO,
secure.

fern.

KHEMi

f.),

cow

(see

Grammar).
to

GOTTAlVr, famUy,

lineage.

KHO (inter).), indeed. KHOMAM, linen.

G.

GOPATI,

to

protect,

guard;

p. p. p. gutto, cp. kayagutto.

GH.
GHARAIVI, house.
gharamen, leading the
householder.
life

GACCHATI, to go (see Grammar). GANG, multitude. GANDO, goitre.

of

GANH ATI, to take, to seize

gahito.

p. p. p.

GHARO,

house.
nose.
to

GHANAM,
bind.

GANTHETI, to tie, to GANDO, smell, odour.

GHAYATI,

smeU.
C.

GABBHARO, a cleft. GABBHO, womb, belly. GAMBHiRO (adj.), deep.

gammo,
accessible.
(f.),

CA

(conj.), and, also.

(n.), eye, insight.

CAKKHU
cakkhumd

(adj.),

having

eyes,

GARAHA GARU (m.),

blame.

having insight,

parent, teacher.

CANDO (adj.), wrathful, passionate.

catuttho,

garu-karo, respect. GAHATTHO, a householder.

fourth

catutthath,

for

the fourth time.

GATHA,
gamini

stanza.

catud-disam,
points.

the

four

cardinal

(adj.), leading.

GAMO,
tible.

village.

catup-pado, having four

feet.

^ara^Ao (adj.), blameable; contemp-

CATTARO
((.),

(num.),

four;

cataio

cattari (n.).

GARAVO,
gavi, cow.

reverence.

CARANAM,
CARATI, CAVATI,
to

good conduct.

to go.

GIMHO,
GIRA,

heat.

disappear

p. p. p.

GIMHANAM,

hot season.

cuto.

voice, speech.

CAVANAlfl, disappearance,

death.
;

GIRI, mountain.

CAGO,

liberality,

self-sacrifice

GILATI,

to devour.
(adj.), sick, iU.

abandoning.

GILANO
OITAM,

singing, a song.

CICCITAYATI, CITTAM, mind.

CINTETI,

to splash.

GUTTI (f.), guarding. GUMBO, a bush, a thicket.

cittako (adj.), mindful.

to think.
11

162

6I.088ART.

CiVARAM,
CUTI,

robe.

disappearing, death.

JIVHA (f.), JlRANAM,

JlRATI,

tongue.

growing old; decay.

life.

cetasiko (adj.), mental.

to g-r()w ohl.

CETO,

mind.

ceto-vimutti, emancipation of mind.

JiVIKA (f.), livelihood, JIVITAM, life.

JIVI
(adj.), living.
(f.),

CORO,

tliief.

JUTI
CH.

splendour

jutima, po8-

sesf^ed

with splendour. part of a compound

CHA (num.),

six.

JO,
'

at last

CHATTHO, sixtli. CHAPPETI, to tlirow

renounce.

arising from.'

away, to

JH.

CHANDO, wish, resolve, intention. CHAMBHATI, to be alarmed. CHAMBHITATTAM, trembling.

JHANAM

(t. t.),

meditation.

CHAYA

(f.),

shadow.
to cut off.

SATTI (f.), announcement, declaration,

CHINDATI,

formula.

^ANAM,
J.

knowledge.
relative.

]SATAK0, a

Janapado, a country.
janeti (caus. jay at i), to bring forth,
to produce.

5^ATI, kinsman.

NAYO,

right method.

JANETTI, a mother. JANO, man, person, being.

p.

DAMSO,
PASATf,

a gad-fly.
to bite
;

JARA

(f.),

old age, decay.

p. p. p. dattho.

JARO, JALATI, to bum. JAHATf, to leave

fever.

PAHO,
behind.

burning.

TH.

JATARCPAM,
JATI
(f.),

gold.

XHANl

(adj.),

having
having

breasts

birth.

timbarutthani,

breasts

JATU

(adv.), verily.

like a tinduka fruit.

Jato (p. p. p.), lomahatthajato, the hair standing on end terrified.

THANAM,
THITI
(f.),

standing.

thanaso (adv.), causally, necessarily.

durability;
life.

JANATI,

to

know.

[duced.
to be pro-

JAY ATI, to be JALA (f.), flame.

JIGUCCHATI,

bom,

T.

to dislike.

TAOGHA
TACO,

(adv.), verily.

JIOHACCHA
jinnako

(f.),

hunger.

skin.
rice

(adj.), old.

TANDULO,

ready for boiling.

GLOSSARY.

163

TANHA
tatiyo,

(f.),

lust,

desire;

maha-

DAKKHINO
southern.

(adj.),

right-handed;

tanho, Imviiig great desire.

third
;

tatlyam,

for

the

DAKKHINEYYO (adj.), worthy of

oflfe

third time.

rings.
(adj.),

TATRA

(adv.), tliere.

DALHO
DANDO,
[tint.
f.

firm.

TAPASSi (m.), hermit. TAPO, penance.

staff.

DADATI,
p. 56).
tisso,

to give (see

Grammar,

TAMO,

darkness.
(num.), three;

TAYO

n.

DADDALLATI,
brilliantly.

to blaze, to shine

TARATI,

to cross, to overcome.

TALAM, surface, level. TASO (adj.), moving, moveable.

TALO, fan-palm. TITTHATI, to stand TINAM, grass.
[mar).
(see Grana-

DADDU

(f.),

leprosy.

DANTO, a tooth. DAMO, self-command.

dammo
(adj.), to
(f.),

be tamed.

DAYA

TIDDANAM,

destroyer.

TIMBARU
TIRIYAM

(m.). the tinduka-tree.

DARl (f.), DAVO, amusement.

mercy, pity. a cave.

tiracchdnagato, a beast, an animal.

(adv.), across.

TU

(particle),

now, but.
cotton-tree.

TUNDlKiRO,

TUNHI

(adv.), silently.

DASA (num.), ten. DASSANAM, insight, discernment. DANAM, alms. DANI (adv.), now. DAYADO, kinsman.
DAYO, a forest. DARO, DARA, wife. DASO, slave.
,

TUVATAM (adv.),

quickly.

TEJO (n.), splendour. TELAM, rape-oil.

TVAM

(pron.),

you,

thou

(see

di-jo, twice

born.

Grammar).

ditthapado, one
state
{i.e.

who has

seen the

Nibbana).

TH.

DITTHA
stubborn,

(interjection).

THADDHO
;

(adj.), firm,

proud jati-tthaddho, proud of his

birth.

DITTHI (f.), view, beUef. DIBBO (adj.), celestial.

DIVASO,
a day.
divasd (adv.), during the day.
diva ca ratio,

THANAYATI,

to thunder.

THAVARO
THERO,

(adj.), stationary, firm.

day and night.

a priest, an elder.
(adj.), big.

DISA

THOLO

a point of the compass. (f.), disaati (pass, of passati), to be seen.

DiGHO (adj.),
D.

long.
pain.
place.

DUKKHAM
kUL

(t.t.),

DAKKHATA

(f.),

DUG-GATI,

hell,

bad

un
dutiyo, second

GL088ART.

; dutiyath (adv.), fur second time. the

duvijano, difficult to understand.

DHiRO (adj.), wise. DHUTTO, fraudulent. DHUNATI, to shake.

dhurava, taking the yoke.

DUSSAM, cloth. DOBHATI, to illtreat.

durato (adv.), from
far.

DHURO,

ayoke.
beast of burden.

DHORAYHO,

DORE (adv.),
deva-ko, god.
devatd, a deva.

far.

N.

devaputto, a god.

DEVO, a god. DESAYATI, deseti, DESO, country.

DESSi,
hater.

to preach.

DEHO,

body.
dejection, gloom.

NA (neg.), not. NAKHO, nail of the finger. NAGARAM, a town. NANGALAM, plough. NACCAM, dancing. NANDI (f.), joy. NAMATI, to bow down.

domanasaam,

DOSO (Skr. dvesha), anger, hatred. DOSO (Skr. dosha), defect, blemish. DVAYO, of two sorts, divers.
dvi-padako, having two
feet.

NAM ASS ATI, to honour. NAMO (indecl.), honour, reverence

(with the dative).

NARASA BHO,
NARO, man. NALINi (f.),

chief of

men.

DVE

(num.), two.
(adv.), in

a pond.

dvedha

two parts.

NAVA

(num.), nine.

NAVANlTAM,
DH.
tiavamo, ninth.

cream.

DHAJAGGAM, flag. DHANAM, property,

wealth.
;

NAVO (adj.), new. NAHATAKO

who
is

(t. t.),

one
is

in

whom
;

DHAMMO

(t. t.),

law, condition

spiritual instruction

complete

ditthadhammo, the

visible condi-

cleansed, pure.

tion, the present world.

NAHARU,
superhu-

tendon, muscle.
;

uttarimanuasa-dhavimo,

NAGO,
young

a serpent
serpent.

susunago,

man

condition.

dhamma-vicayo, religious research.

NALIKERO,

coconut-tree.
diversity.

DHAMMO
dhammi.

(adj.), religious

fem.

NANATTAM,

NANA
(n.

(adv.),

various,

different

DHATU

and

f.),

substance;

away from.
ndna-pjtakdro, of various sorts.

principle.

bearing dharayati (cans.), to bear

DHARANAM,
(f.)f

in

mind.
in

NAMA
ndmaso

(adv.),

by name
;

indeed.

mind.

NAMAM,

name

namanpam (t. t.).

name.

DHITI

wisdom, energy.

(adv.), with

GLOSSARY.

NIKAYO,
NI
(prep.,

assembly,

multitude

ni-vdsi (adj.), dwelling.

ni-vdseti, to dress.

sa^^an/Arayo,

assemblage of beings.
composition),

only iu

ni-vesanam, house, abode.

ni-vutOy obstructed.

downwards.

NI and NIR

(prep., only in

com-

ni-sdmeti, to attend, listen to.

ni-sidati, to sit

position), outward.

down.
resource
;

ni-kubbati, to deceive.

NISSAYO
nissaya,

(t. t.),

cattdro

nik-kanii (adj.), free from desire.

nik-kttjjito,

what has been over-

nis-saranarh, outcome, result.

thrown.
nik-k/iamati, to go out.

nis-sdya (ger.), dependent upon.

nihtno (adj.), low,

vile.

nik-khamati, to devote.
ni-kkhepo,
putting

NICO
;

(adj.), low,

mean, base.

down

inter-

nt-yati, to

go

out.
surely.

ment.

NONA (adv.),
a town.

NIGAMO,

nekkhammam, giving up
ne-katiko, fallacious.

the world.

ni-gdhako, an oppressor, enemy.

NIGRODHO, NICCO (adj.),

ni-pako
(adj.),

banyan-tree.
perpetual.

NETTAM,

eye.

ni-jigimsati, to covet.

P.

prudent.

PA

(prep.), frequently in

composi-

ni-patati, to fall

down.
to be extinguished,

tion, before,

onward.

NIBBATI
to

(t.t.),

PAMSU

(n.), dust, dirt.

go

out.
(t. t.),

pa-kdsati, to be visible, to manifest.

NIBBANAM
bonum
nibbuto

the

summum

PAKKHANDIKA
PAKKHI
wing.
(adj.),

(f.),

diarrheea.

of the Buddhists.
tranquillity (Nibbdna).
free

possessed

with

NIBBUTI,

(t. t.),

from care, or

PARK H IK AM

(t. t.),

a feast held

having attained Nibbana.

nibhdsi (adj.), shining.

on the eighth day of the month. pa-kkhipati, to throw.

NIMANTANAM
NIMITTAM,
of thought.

(t. t.),

invitation.

pa-gumbo,

thicket.

sign,

mark;

subject

pa-gganhdti, to hold out, to bring

forth, to get ready.

nit/ydniko, leading to salvation.

PACATI,

to cook.

NIYO

(adj.),

own.

pa-cdro, attendant.

NIRAYO,

hell.

pacca-kdlo, present time.

nt-rt<i//}a/t (pass.), to cease, to perish.

PACCAITAM
paccantko
opposite.

(adv.), singly.

NIRODHO
NIVATO,

(t.t.),

cessation.
[off.
off,

(adj.),

adverse, hostile,

humility.
to

ni-vareti (cans.), to keep

ward

PACCAYO,

a requisite.

160
pacca-vekkhati, to look
at.

OLOSSART.
pati-bujjhati, to awake.
pati-bhdti, to appear, to be evident.

pacc-ud-a-vattati, to retreat.

pacceko, each one, single, several.

pati-rupo (adj.), suitable,

fit.

PACCHIMO
last
;

(adj.),

l.indermost,

pati-lab/tati, to obtain, to receive.

pacchimd

disd, the west.

pati-ldbho, obtaining

attainment.
;

pa-jahati, to abandon.

pati-vatteti, to subvert
to be subverted.

with a, not

PA J A

(f.),

progeny, race.

pa-jjalat't, to burn, to blaze.

pati-vijjhati, to acquire.
;

pa-janati, to know, to understand

caus. pahndpeti, to
p. p. p. panhatto.

pati-sankhdti, to reflect.

make known

pati-sahcikkhati, to consider.

pati-mm-vedi

(adj.), experiencing.

pajdyati, to multiply.
pajjalati, to shine.

pati-sarano, refuge, help,

pati-sundti, to

assent

aor. pace-

pajjoto, light, lustre,

pajjoto, an oil-lamp.

lamp

tela-

assosi,

paccassosum.

pati-sevati, to practise, to receive.

PANCA (num.),
pahcamo, the

five.

PATHAVl
under-

(f.),

earth.

fifth,

pa-ndmati, to bend,
intellect,

PANNA,

wisdom,

pa-ni-dahati, to stretch.

standing.

PANIDHI
question.

(m.), aspiration (t.t).

PANHAM (panham),
PATI

pantto
lent
;

(adj.),

accomplished, excelneuter,

and PATI, towards, back,

as

term

for

in return; in composition before

nibbdna.

vowels, pace.
pati-kkatnati, to step backwards.

PANDITO,

wise man.

pati-kkamo, retreating.

PANDU (adj,), yellow. PANHO and PANHO, question.

PATATI,
to
fall
;

pati-ggahanam, acceptance,
ing (to ganhdti).

receiv-

caus. patayatu

pati-rupo, suitable.
ofi^.

pati-ghdto, repulsion, warding

pati-sallanam, solitude.

PATI-GHO,

anger.

patisalldndrdmo, delighting in solitude.

puti-cchddanarh, concealment.
pati-cchddi, covering.
pati-cchddeti, to conceal.
pati-jdndti, to
aor.

PA-TITTHA
place.
;

(f.),

fixity,

resting-

know,

to personate

PATTAM,
liness.

leaf.

paccamasi.
(t. t.),

pattakallam, seasonableness, timeforsaking.

pati-nis-sago

way. pati-pujeti, to honour. pati-ppa-ssambhati, to be calmed,

({.),

patipadd

step,

pattactvaram, bowl and robe.

to

PATTI (f.), obtaining, PATTO, bowl.

acquisition.

subside, to

come

to

an end.

patto, p. p. p, of pdpundti.

GLOSSARY.

167
apparatus.

PATTHAYATI,
desire.

to

wish

for,

to

PARIKKHARO,

pari-kkhino, wasted.
step; nibbana.
pari-cito (p. p. p.), accumulated.

PA DAM,

pa-dahati, to strive, to exert.

PARINAMO,
digestion.

change, alteration

PA-DlPO, lamp.
pa-duttho, wiclied,
evil.

PARITTA
(the

(f.

and

n.), protection.

PANA

(adv.),

now,

further

PARIDEVO,
pari-nibbdti

lamentation.
to attain

same as puna).
pa-nudati, to remove,
to reject.

(t. t.),

Nibbana.

pari-pako, maturity, perfection.

PANTHO,
PAPPOTI,

a road

also neuter.

pari-punno, completed.
pari-bhasati, to revile.

see papunati.

PAPPHASAM,
pa-bba-jati, to

lungs.
forth.

pari-mukham (adv.), in
one

front, before.

go

pariy-addti, to seize, lay hold of.

PA-BBAJITO

(t. t.),

who has
life.

pariy-dpundti, to learn thoroughly

p. p. p.

given up the world. PABBAJJA (f.), monastic

pariydputo.

pari-ydyo, succession, order, way.

PABBAJJA
ordination.

(f.) (t.t.),

the pabbajja

pari-yosdnam, termination.
pari-rundhati, to surround
;

to lay

PABBATO,
PABHASO,
pamatto,

mountain..

siege.

pabhamkaro, light-giving.
splendour.
[ful.

parl-vatto, circle, succession

fication.

modi

pa-majjati, to delay.

pari-vanneti, to describe, to praise.

pari-vdreti (cans.), to surround, to

p. p. p. to pamajjati, sloth(adj.),

pa-maddt
ing.

crushing, destroy-

accompany.

PARI-VESANA
bution of food.

(f.

and

n.),

dUtri-

PA-MANAM, measure. PAMADO, carelessness.

pO'tnuhcati, to release.

PARISA,

assembly.

pari-sujjhati (pass.), to be purified.

pa-mussati, to leave behind.

parisuddho

(adj.), pure, clear.

PAMOCANAM,
pa-yutto, tied.

deliverance.

payirupa-sati, to honour.

PARISSAYAM, danger. PARIHARO, attention.

pareto, dead, destroyed.

PARAM

(adv.),

beyond, after.

PARO
other.

(adj.),

distant,

further

paramo, highest.
parabhava, sufiering,
loss.

PARO

(adv.),

beyond, more than.

PARABHAVO,
PARI
it

decay, loss.

PALASO,

leaf.

(prep.), around, about, fre-

paligho, an obstacle.

quently used in composition, where

PA-VACANAM,
Buddha.

the

word of the

appears also as PALI.

168
to
set

GLOSSARY.
(caus.),

pa-vatteti

rolling;

PATIPADIKAM (t.t.), food offered

on the day following fuU-muon
day.

dhammacakke, having founded the kingdom of truth. PAVANAM, side of a mountain.

pavattite

PATANAM,
riage
;

causing to

fall.

pa-vapati, to sow.
pa-vassati, to rain.

gabbhapatanam,

causing

miscar-

abortion.

pa-vuati, to enter.
palayati, to run away.

PATi

(f.),

a bowl.

PATU
to

(adv.), manifestly.

pali-gunthati, to
tangle.

envelop,

en-

patu-bhavati,

to

become

visible

aor. patur-ahosi.

PALLANKO,
pa-sattho (p. p.

a couch.
p.), praised.

patu-bhavo, appearance.
[fied.

pada-talarh, sole of the foot.

pa-sanno, p. p. p. to pasidati, satispa-sahati, to use force.

PADO,

a small silver coin.

pdddraho, worth a pdda.

pa-sado, brightness, clearness, gladness.

pa-acuiati, to rule.

PADO,
pdpako

foot.

PANAM,

drinking.
bad.

(adj.),

PASU, cattle. PASSATI, to see.

pa-ssaddhi

pdpiccho, having sinful desires.

PAPUNATI, PAPONOTI, PAPPOTI,

p. p.

calming down. pa-ssambhati, to calm down ; p.

(f.),

to attain

pattabbo, attitin-

able.

passaddho.

PAPO

(adj.), evil,

bad.

pa-ssambhayam, calming down.

pa-ssasati, to exhale air.

PAYASO, rice-milk. PARAM, the other shore.

pdrarh Gangdya, across the Ganges.
pdri-sajjo
(adj.),
;

PASSAVO,

urine.

PAHANAM,

abandoning.

belonging to an

pa-hitatto, resolute.

assembly

brahmapdrisajjo, be-

pahuto, much, abundant.

pa-hoti, to be able.

longing to the retinue of

Maha-

brabma.
pdri-suddhi, purity, perfection.
dressed,

pa-honako

(adj.), sufficient.

pakimo

(adj.),

cooked,

PALAYATI,
pdliccam,
hair.

to guard, to preserve.

ripfned.

hoariness,

greyness

of

PACANAM, a goad. PANAM, living being.

panatipati (adj.), taking PANO, breath.
life.

[season. pd-vuasako, belonging to the rainy

PASANO, PASADO,
pdhuneyyo
guests.

a stone.
house of more than one

PANAKO, worm, PANI (m.), hand.

insect.

storey, tower, palace.

(adj.),

worthy of being

patikankho, to be expected.

GLOSSARY.
backbiting.

109
full.
(f.),

pitthi-mamsiko
pilakd
(f.),

(adj.),

PORO,

a boil.
(t.t.),

PEKHA
food received

PINIJAPATO
in the

looking for

punnapekho, good works.

;

desire

alms bowl.

pecca

(ger,),

having departed.
a bird.

PINDI (f.), lump, mass. PINDO, lump, ball food alms. PITA (m.), father (see Grammar).
;

peseti (caus.), to send.

POKKHARASAKATO,
POTAKO,
potikd
(f.),

youth, cub.

PITTAM,
PI-NASO,
PI PAS A,

bile.

maiden.

cold in the head.

pothujjaniho, belonging to an un-

thirst.

converted person

sensual.

PIPPHALI (f.), long pepper. PIYO (adj.), dear. PISUNO (adj.), backbiting.

ponobbhaviko,
birth.

connected with re-

PORANO

and

PORANAKO,
to

old.

PIHAKAM,
PiTI,

spleen.

POSO, man.

joy, delight.

PLAVATI,
question.

or piluvati,

float;

PUGGALO, individual. PUCCHATI, to ask, to

caus. pildpeti.

PUNNO
PUTTO,

(adj.),

good, virtuous.
[wide.

PH.

son.

PUTHU
PUNA,

(adv.), separately, far

and

PHARATI, to flash, to shine PHARUSO, harsh, unkind.

forth.

see

PANA.
flower.

PHALAM,
PHALATI,

fruit.

punab-bhavo, rebirth.

to

split

asunder,

to

PUPPHAM,

break open.

pubbanho, forenoon.

PHANITAM,
PHALO,

sugar.
split, to cleave.

PUBBO
PUBBO,

(adj.),

former, early.

phdleti (caus.), to

pus, matter.

ploughshare.
(adj.),

PURAM,

town.

PHASU

comfortable.

pura-kkharoti, to put in front.

phdsu-vihdro, comfort, ease.

purato (adv.),

in front of.

PHUTO,
p. p. p.

thrilled,

pervaded.
to

puratthhno

(adj.), eastern.

PHUSATI,

to

touch,

reach;

PURA (adv.),

formerly, previously.

phuttho.
(adj.), flowering, blos-

PURANO, former. PURIMO. east.

PURISAKO,
minister, attendant.

PHUSSITO
soming.

PHOTTABBAM

(t. t.),

touch.

PURISO, man,

a male.

pujako, honouring.

B.

POJA, attention, veneration. POJETI, to honour.

PCTI,
stinking, foal.

BANDHATI,
fetter.

to bind.

BANDHAXAM,

binding;

bonds,

170

OL088ART.
kinsmnn.

BANDHU (m.),

BHAJATf,
cultivate.

to serve, to

honour; to

BALI (in.), religious offering. BALIVADDO, an ox.

BAHU(adj.), many.
bahu-ppado, having

BHANATI, BHANATI,
nnati.
first

to shine.
to

speak; pass, bha-

many
'

feet.

BALHO

(adj.),

hard, severe, as
very.'

BHATTAM,
aaldka
(t.

food; uddeta

(t.t.),
;

part of a

compound

food given on special occasions

t), ticket food.

BALO (adj.), young, foolish. BAHIRO (adj.), external.

BiJAM, grm,
seed.

BHADANTO,

term

for

addressing

a Buddhist monk.

BUDDHO,
Gotama
'

and used as

an epithet of Gotama, a designation of

constituents

BHADDO, BHADRO BHAYAM, fear.

BHARATI,
BHAVATI,

(adj.),

good.

the Enlightened.'
(t. t.),

to bear, to support.

BOJJHANGO
of wisdom.

BH AVAIVT, lord, sir (see Grammar).

to be, to exist.

BODHI

(f.),

wisdom.
to say, to
tell.

BHAVANAM,
realm.

being,

existence

BRAVlTI, BROTI,

BRAHMAM, practice of devotion. also BRAHMACARIYAM (t.

t.,

fem.), a religious life

the duties

BHAVO, corporeal existence, birth. BHAGO, portion, part, share. BHATARO, brother.

of a religious

life.

BHATA (m.),
BHARO,
to
re-

brother.

BRAHMANO,
by-anti-karoti,

a brahmin.
to

burden.
to bhavati), to
in-

abolish,

bhdveti

(cans,

move.

crease, to cause to exist.

BY AS AN AM,
piness.

misfortune, unhap>

BHAVO, property. BHASATI, to tell.

byd-karoti, to answer.

BHIKKHU,
monk.

title

of

a Buddhist

BYADHI

(m.), illness.

BYAPADO,

wish to injure.
(f.),

BHIKH;^N! (f), female mendicant.

BYAROSANA

anger.

BH.

BHISMO (adj.), terrible. BHiYO, BHIYYO (adj.), BHiRU (adj.), timid.

BHUJISSO,
slave.

more.

BHAKKHO (adj.), eating. BHAOANDALA fistula. BH AGAVA (adj.), worshipful,

(f.),

a free

man; a

freed

BHUNJATI,
bhummo

to enjoy

to eat.

venerable

an

epithet

of

the

(adj.), terrestrial.

Buddha.

BHUSAM
(f.),

(adv.),

much, exceed-

BHAGINl

sister.

ingly.

BHANGAJVI, hempen

cloth.

bhutakalo, time to speak the truth.

GLOSSARY.
bhutapubbo
before.

171

(adj.),

that

has

ben

BH CTO,
BHEDO,

spirit,

being.

MANTETI, to consult, to advise. MANTO, hymn the Vedns. MANDIVO, slowness, stupidity.
;

BHCMI(f.),

the earth.

mamayito, concerning oneself ; own.

parting.
(adj.), frightful.

BHERAVO
BHO,
sir,

MAYURO, MORO, peacock. MARANAM, dying, death.

mahab-balo, having great strength.

BHESAJJAM,
BHOGO,
having

medicine.
(see
;

master

Grammar).
appa-bhogo,

MAHA,
noble.

great (see

Grammar).

wealth
little

mahd-matto, king's minister,

g^at

property.
food.

BHOJANAM,

maha-raja, king, great king.

MA,
M.

negation.

MALUTO,

wind.

MAMS AM, flesh.

MAKASO,
a gnat, mosquito.
(adj.),

MANAVAKO
concealing
;

MAKKHI
MAGGO,

pa-

a (adj.), young; young man. MATA (f.), mother (see Grammar).

pamakkhi,

hypocritical.

path.
troubled, restless.

MANASO, lust. MANUSO, MANUSi

human.

(f.)

(adj.),

MANKU,

MANGALO (adj.), happy. MACCU (m.), death.

MAJJAM,
majjhimo
strong drink.
middle.
(adj.),

MANO,

pride, arrogance.
(f.),

MAYA

illusion, deceit;

mayavi,

deceitful.

MARISO,

venerable person

term

MAJJHO, middle. MANNATI, to think.

of address.

MALA

(f.),

a garland.
deer.

MAXDANAM, adornment. MANDALI (adj.), having a disc. MATTA (f.), measure quality. MATTHAKAM, head. MATTHALUNGAM, brain.
;

MASO, month. MIGO, antelope,

MICCHA
MITTO,
awake.

(adv.), falsely,

wrongly.

miccha-caro,

wrong conduct.
sleep

friend.
;

MADO,

enjoyment.
honey.

MIDDHAM,
MINATI,
pleasant,
tnetabbo.
to

vigatamiddho,

MADHU(n.),

madfiumeho, diabetes.

measure

p.

f.

p.

MANAPO,
charming.

pleasing,

MUKHAM,
cause.

mouth, face; means,

MANUSSO, man, human being. MANO, mind (also neuter).

tnanoramo
ful.

MURHO,

face.
(f.),

(adj.), pleasant, delight*

MUCCHA

faintnesB.

MUNCATI,

to release.

172

GLOSSARY.
shaveling,

MUNDAKO,
reproach.

term

of

yasassl (adj.), famous.

YACATI,
urine
;

to ask, to beg, to entreat.

MUTTAM,
MUTTr(f.),

putimuttam,

YATI,

to go.
(f.),

urine of cattle.
release.

YATRA

livelihood.

YANAM,

going,

preceding

car-

MUDU (adj.), soft. MUDDHA (m.), head. MUDHA (adv.), gratis, for nothing.
MUSA (adv.),
MUHUTTO,
of time.

riage, car.
ydni-fcato, used as a vehicle.

YAPANAM,
YAPANATI,

maintenance.
to live.

wrongly. musa-vddo, lying, falsehood.

second, hrief

YAVA

(adv.),

as long

ydva
;

ki-

measure

vanca, and as long as

in con-

junction with eva, ydvad eva, so

MOLHO, stupid. MCLAM, root.

MCSTKO,
a
fly.

long

as.

Y'UGAM,

pair

generation.

MEG HO, cloud, storm, rain. METHUNO (adj.), relating

sexual intercourse.

to

YUGO (also neuter), yoke. [to. Y UN J ATI, to turn one's attention YEBHUYYO (adj.), abundant
;

yebhuyyena,

in

great numbers.

ME DO, fat, blubber.

MERAYAM,
intoxicating liquor.

YO (pron.), who (see Grammar). YOGAKKHEMO, security

;

t.

t.

MODATI, to rejoice. MORO, see MAYURO.

Nibbana.

MOHO,

ignorance.

YOTTAM, tie. YONI (f.), womb

YONISO,
really.

source, origin.

Y.

YOBBANAM,

youth.

YAKANAJfr,

the liver.

YAKKHO,
yaksha.

a superhuman being, a

R.

RAKKHATI,
;

to protect.

YATI,

to restrain

p. p. p. yato.

RAKKHA
as

(f.),

protection.

YATO (adv.), since. YATTHA (adv.),

^

the

same

yatra,''

inasmuch.
as.

RAJATAM, silver. RAJJAM, kingdom. RATTI (f.), night.

ratti-n-divo,

YATHA (adv.),
the reality.

day and night.

(adj.),

yathabhutam (adv.), according to

RABHASO
fierce.

contemptuous,

YADA (adv.),
YASO,
men.
ycusassivd,

when, whenever.

RAMATI,
light in
;

to enjoy oneself, to derato, delighting.

;

fame, renown.

surrounded

by eminent

RASO,
taste.

sap, juice

sweet thing

GLOSSART.
rtusako
(adj.), short.

178

RASSO (adj.), short. RAHADO, a deep pool, a lake. RAHO, solitude. RAGO, evil desire, greed, attachment,
lust.

V.

VAKKAM,

kidney.
to

vaggiyo (adj.), belonging

a group.

VAGGU

(adj.), beautiful.

rajadhant, royal city.

rajabhato, king's soldier.

VACCO, lustre. VAJATI, to walk. VAJIRO, Indra's thunderbolt.

RAJA (m.), king, see Grammar. RAMO, joy, delight. RITTO [rishta], injured.

VANCANIKO, deceitful. VANCETI (caus.), to deceive. VADDHATI, to grow, to increase;

to

RUDDO (adj.),
RUKKHO,
a

cruel.

pour out.
;

tree.

VANNO, appearance, beauty, form

caste
;

ROPAM

(t. t.),

form, figure.

vannava

(adj.),

having

ROGO, illness. ROCETI (caus.),

beauty.
to approve.

VATA

(inter).),

indeed

verily

ROSAKO

(adj.),

wTathful.

VATTATI,

to take place.

VATTHAM,
LABHATI,
laddho.
to

cloth

raiment.

take

p. p. p.

VATTHU VATTHU
V AD ATI,

(n.),

substance.

(m.), a site, a building

(Skr. vdstu).
to declare
;

LAYO,
time).

instant (brief measure of

to speak.

LASIKA

(f.),

the fluid which lubri-

cates the joints.

LABHA
vantage

(adv.
of.

dat.),

for the ad-

VANAM, wood, forest. VANATHO, desire, lust. VANIBBAKO, mendicant. VANDAKO, praising.
VANDATI, to praise. VAPATI, to sow. VAPPO, sowing.
varanhu, knowing what
varado, giving what
is
is

LUDDO
LOKO,

(adj.), cruel.

world.

loka-jettho, chief of the world.

excellent.

LOKA-DHAMMO

(t. t.),

things of

excellent.
is

the world, worldly condition.

varaharo, bringing what

excellent.

loka-dhatu, world-system.
loka-vidu,

VARO
(epi-

(adj.), excellent
(f.),

knowing the world

hair of the body.

VALl

a wrinkle.

thet of the Buddha).

valittaro (adj.), ^Tinkled.

LOMAM,

VASATI,

to dwell.

LOMAHAIMSO, horripilation. LOHITAM, blood.

vatalako, wretched, outcast.

VASA
flesh.

(f.),

serum

marrow of the

LOHITO

(adj.), red.

174

GLOSSARY.
outcast.
;

VASALO,
VASSO,

VI-TAKKO,
either
. .

reflection,

thought.

rain

a year.
tfd,

VA (conj.), VACA (f.),

VATO,

pa

or.

VITACCHIKA (f.), scabies. VITTAM, property, wealth.

vitthdrati,
to declare, to amplify
;

word, saying, speech.

wind.

aor. vitthasi.

[cation.

VADITAM, music. VADO, speaking, speech. VAYAMATI, to struggle, to strive.

vitthdro, detail, extension, amplifi-

VI DO

(adj.),

knowing, wise.

VI-NAYO,

training.

VAyAMO
vour.

(t. t.),

exertion, endea-

VINA

(adv.), without.

vi-ndseti, to waste.

VASO,

dwelling, living, abode.

vineti, to

remove, to put away.

VAHANAM,
VI
(prep.),

carrying; a vehicle; an animal used in riding.

vinodanam, removal, dispelling.

vinodeti (cans.), to dispel.

used

in

composition,

VINDATI,

to acquire.

asunder, apart from.

vi-kalo,

vi-pdceti, to be indignant.

wrong

time.
;

VI-PARI-NAMO,
manussa,
a
vi-ppa-mutto

change, reverse.

VIGGAHO,
human

body

(p. p. p.), released.

being. [parsing. vi-kirano (adj.), squandering, disvi-kkandati, to cry out.

vi-gahati, to obtain.

vi-ppa-yogo, absence.
vippa-vasati, to

go abroad

p. p. p.

vippavuttho.
vippavdso,
wise,
dis-

absence

ticivarenca

vi-cakkhano,
cerning.
vi-carati, to

knowing',

avippavdso, not parting with the

three robes.

wander.

vi-ppa-sldati, to

become calm.

vi-cdro, investigation.

vi'bhajati, to divide, to distinguish.

VICIKICCHITAM, doubt. VICCHIKO, scorpion.

vi-jand-vato (adj.), understanding.
vi-jeti, vi-jinuti, to

VIBHAVO, power, VI-BHAVO (t. t.),

prosperity.

absence of ex-

istence, formless existence.

conquer.
(see

vibhdvayatl, to understand.
vibhusanaiii,

VIJJATI,

to

know

Grammar).

adornment.
to

VIJJATI,

to be, to exist.

vi-muncati,
vimutto.

release

p. p. p.

VIJJA VIJJU

(f.),
(f.),

knowledge, wisdom.
lightning.

VI.MUTTI(f.),
in-

release.

vijjuko (adj.), lightning.

VIIK^NANAM,
telligence.

consciousness,

VI-MOKHO, release. VI-MOCAVAM, releasing.

vi-rajo, free

from corruption, pure

be displeased

vihndpeti

(cans,

to

vijdndti),

to

free

from dust.
;

speak

to, to

address, to inform.

vi-rajjdti, to

p. p. p.

VINNO

(adj.), intelligent.

viratto.

GLOSSARY.

176

VIRATI

(f.),

abstinence.

vi-ramati, to abstnin.
vi-ravati, to cry aloud.

VEDAGO (t. t.), knowing the law. VEDANA (f.) (t. perception,
t.),

sensation.

vi-rago, absence of desire.

vira>eti (cans.), to

VEPULLAM,

development.

put away.

veyyd-karanam, explanation.

VIRIYAM,
vi-ruhati, to
vi-rocati, to

exertion, strength.

VEYYABADHIKO,
byabddho.

sick,

ill;

to

go on.
lie

[al>l.).

brilliant.
toilet
;

VILEPANAM,
vi-varati, to

perfume.

open

p. p. p. vivato.

VERAMANi (f.), abstinence VEROCANAKO, bright. VELA (f.), time, occasion.

;

(with

VI-VEKO,

separation,

seclusion

VELO,
VESi

time.
diversity.

discrimination.
viviccati (pass.), to separate oneself.

VEVANNIYAM, change,
(f.),

harlot.

VISAM,
vi-samo

poison.

(adj.),

uneven.

VEHASO, sky. VOROPETI (cans.),

S.

to deprive of.

vi-auddho, (adj.), pure.

VISOKAM, show, spectacle. VISOCIKA (f.), cholera.

VISESO,
distinction. vi-ssuto (adj.),

SA, as
'

first

member

of a

compound
bond, at-

with.'
(t. t.),

renowned.

SAMYOJANAlff
tachment.

viharati, to dwell.

VI-HARO, living;
vi-himsati, to hurt.

Buddhist temple.

samhanti, to strike.

VI HI MSA

(f.),

hurting.

SAKO (adj.), own. SAKKACCA (adv.),

a-vito,

attentively.
(t. t.),

mta-malo, spotless. VITO (adj.), devoid of;

free from.

SAK-KAYA-DITTHI
not
ceit.

con-

vitipatati, to transgress.
vi-ti-sareti, to

SAK-KAYO, own body or SAK-KARO, hospitality.

honour.

person.

remind mutually.

aak-karoti, to receive hospitality, to

ViRO,

hero.

ViSATI

(num.), twenty.
(f.),

SAKKO

(adj.), able.

VUTTHI
VUTTI
vun-ma

rain.

SAKKHf,

witness.
(m.),

(f.),

conduct.

SAKHA
(see

companion, friend

vutiiavd, dwelling, residing.

(adj.), dwelling.

Grammar).
heaven.
(t.t.),

SAGGO,

vupakattho, distant, removed.

8ANKAPP0

thought, Imagi-

VOPASAMO,

paciBcation.

nation, aspiration.

VE

(interj.), indeed.

tan-kampati, to quake, to tremble.

VEiyU

(m.), a

bamboo, a reed.

san-kuddho, ang^y.

176

GLOSSARY.
the elements,

SAN-KHARO
matter.

(t. t.),

SADDO, sound. SADDHA, faith.

san-khipati, to shorten, to abridge.

aan-khittena, concisely,

l)riefly.

SADDHIM (adv.), with. SANTA M (a term for Nibbana).

aan-tatto, scorched.

SAN-GAHO,

protecting.

SAN-GAM O, conflict, battle. SAN-GHATi (t.t.), one of the three

robes of a priest.

tan-tarati, to be in haste.

SANG HO,

the

Buddliist

clerical

SANTIKE (adv.), in the presence of. SANTUTTHi (f.), contentment. SANTUSSAKO, contented.
SANTO,
true, good.

community.

SACE (conj.), if. SACCAM, truth.

tacchikaroti, to
see
face
to

san-dasseti (cans.), to show, to teach.

san-ditthiko (adj.), visible.

face
;

aan-dhupdyati, to smoke.
8an-nayhati, to bind, to fasten.

p. p. p. sacchikato.

SACCHIKIRIYA
SANJATI
samamo,
(f.),

(f.),

realization.

san-ni-patati, to assemble.
8annipatiko{a,A].), gathered together.

sahcicca (adv. ger.), intentionally.

birth.

SAPADANAM
8ap

(adv.), constantly

refraining.

pinddya

carati,

goes

his

SANNA (t. t.) (f.), perception. SATHO (adj.), wicked, crafty.

SATTHI
(num.), sixty.
;

begging-rounds constantly.

SAPPI, cow's
sap-puriso,

butter.

good man.

SANHO (adj.), soft smooth, gentle. SATAM (num.), a hundred.

SATI
(f.),

sabbattha (adv.), everywhere.

sabbattho, in every respect.

thoughtfuluess,

remem-

sabba-dhi, from all sides.

brance.

SABBO
memory;
(see

(pron. adj.), every one, all

aatima (adj.) of retentive

thoughtful, reflecting.
Sato,
p. p. p.

Grammar).
(f.),

garati,

recollecting,

an assembly. wretched samana. samanako,

SABHA

mindful.

SAMANO,
seventy.

an

ascetic.

SAITA

(num.), seven.

SATTATI,

tattavdso, abode of beings.

SAM ATTO (adj.), complete. SAMATHO, tranquillity. SAMANTO, all, entire aamantd,
;

SATTO,

being.

from every
teacher.

side.

SATTHAM,

weapon.

aamanndgato, endowed with.

SATTHA (m.),
tad-attho, one's

SAMAYO,
ment ;
a time.
p.p.

time, assembly, agree-

own advantage.
to believe;

ekatii

samayam, once upon

SADA (adv.),
aaddahdno.

always.

SAD-DAHATI,

aama-vekkhati, to take into consideration.

GLOSSARY.
sam-a-gacchati, to assemble.
tam-a-carati, to follow.

177
serene

tam-pa-gadanath, making
tranqiiilization.

sam-a-dapeti (caus. samadiyati), to

instig'ate, to advise.

sam-passati, to behold, to discern.

sam-pa-hamseti
;

(cnus.), to gladden,

sam-a-dahati, to put together

pass.

to delight, to praise.

samadhlyati,
quilized.

to

become

tran-

sampha-ppa-lapo, frivolous talk.

sam-phassa-jo, urising from contact.

SAMADHI SAMANO
similar.

(f.) (t.t.),

meditation.

SAM-PHASSANAM
sam-phasso, contact.

(t.t.),

contact.

(adj.),

equal,

same,
[ment.

sam-bahulo

(adj.),

many.
straits.
(t.

SAM-A-PATTI

(f.)

(t.t.),

attain-

sam-bddAo, pressure,

tam-d-hito, steadfast.
tam-ikkliati, to consider, to reflect.

SAM-BOJJHAJNfGO
stitucnt of bodhi.

t),

con-

SAM-ITI

(f.),

assembly.

sambhav-esi

(adj.),

seeking rebirth.

sam-uk-kajjisati, to exalt.

SAM-BHAVO,
to sanction.

production.
to, to

sain-ug-ghato, removal.

sam-mannati, to agree

decide

sam-ut-thanam, rising, originating.

sam-ut'tejeti (caus.), to
stir, to excite.

SAMMA (indecl.), fully, thoroughly

(used frequently in composition)
;

SAM-UD-AYO,
sam
vated.

rise, origin.
;

ud-eti, to arise

samudito, ele-

Sammd sambuddho,
sam-mukho

the All Wise.

aam-mukht-bhuto, confronted.
sea.
(p. p. p.), set up.
(adj.), face to face.
(f.),

SAMUDDO,

sam-upabbulho

SAM-MUTI

consent,

choice,

sam-uhanti, to remove.

determination.

SAMO,

equal.

sam-pa-kampati, to tremble, to sbake ; a-sam-pa-kampiyo, that

cannot be shaken.
sam-paj'ano, conscious.

sam-muyhatit to be stupefied ; p.p. p. sammulho.

sani'modati, to agree with ; taddhiih

8, to exchange friendly greetings.

SAMVARI
smoke
in

(f.),

night.

sam-patto

(p. p. p.),

endowed with.
to

sam-vaso, living with.

sam-pa-dhupayati, volumes.

sam-viggo, excited.

SAYATI,
endowed with.
union, presence.

to lie

down.

sam-panno

(p. p. p.),

SA YANAM (SENAM), lying, sleeping

;

SAM-PA- YOGO,
tam-parayiko
future.

bed, couch.
refuge.

(adj.), relating to the

SARANAM,

SARABO
future state, next

(f.),

lizard.

SAM-PARAYO,
world.

sar'ito (p. p. p.), flowing.

SARiRAM,
SARO,

body.

tam-pa-vedhati, to tremble.

sound.
12

178

GL08RARY.
a peg
slip, bit

SALAKA,
tal-lahuko

of wood.

(i><lJ-)> l>g)>t.

8IPPAM, skill. SIRIMSAPO, a

tiri-tna (adj.),

snake.

SALLiNO,

bent together.

having magnificence,

SAVANAM, hearing. SASSU (f.), mother-in-law.

glory.

SFRl
SI LA

(f.), (f.),

fortune, prosperity.

SAHA
with.

(in composition),

together,

a rock.
stanza, a qloka.

SITjOKO, a

saha-gato, accompanied.
safiasa (adv.), with violence.

SIVIKA(f.), a palanquin.
SI VO (adj.), auspicious, blest, happy.

SAHASSl,
tion).

thousand

(in

composi-

STMA

(f.).

boundary, limit.

SAHA (adv.),

witli.

SiTAM, coldness. SiTO (adj.), col<l,

cool.
;

aaha-silt (adj.), being fond of society.

SiLAM

(t, t.),

nature, character
piety.

SAKACCHA (f.), conversation. SADHU (adv.), well, good.

SANAM, hempen
SAMICI
(f.),

moral character,

SiLABBATAM
good
rites.

(t.t.), aflfection

of

cloth.

correctness.

sila-va (adj.), virtuous.

SAYANHO,
SAYATI,

evening.

SILI

(adj.),
;

having a

habit, dispo-

to taste.

sition

niddd-tP, drowsy, slothful.

SARATHI,

charioteer.

SiSAM,
should

head.

aarantyo (adj.), that which

Si HO,

lion.

be remembered.
sa-ruppo
(adj.), 6t,

SU
proper.

(in composition), well,

good.

SUKO,

a parrot.
blest,

SALI

(m.), rice.

SUKHO (adj.),
SUKHO,
bliss.

happy.

SALIKA (f.), the maynah-bird. SAVAKO, a disciple.

taveti. {ctius. to sunoti), to impart,

SU-GATO, happy
Buddha).

(epithet of the

to inform.

su-gandho, of good smell.

order,

SASANAM,
Buddhas,
Buddha.

command.
of
the

su-ggahito

(adj.),

grasped.

the

teaching

8UCI

(f.),

purity.

8u-cinno, well done.

SASO,

astlimn.
to learn.

SUNNAGARAI^r,
void of houses.

solitude,

place

SIKKHATI,

SIKHA
sikfia,

(f.),

peak, summit; aggifire.

SUNOTI, SUNATI,
Grammar).

to hear (see

flame of

SIKKH APADA.\I (t. t.), sentence of

moral training.

8uto (p. p. p.), heard, renowned.

gudath (part.),

sma

+ idam.

SINGHANIKA,
SITO

mucus of the

nose.

tu-dul-lahho, very difficult to obtain.

(Skr. gritd), resting upon.

8U-DHAMMAT0 (t.t), perfection.

GLOSSARY.

179
ear.
(f.), (t. t.),

8UDDH0
SUPATI,

(adj.), clean.

SOTAJ*,

[tlon.

su-pati-panno, well-conducted.
to sleep.
sleep.
p.),

SOTAPATTI
SOBHATI,
sovacassatd

sanctifica-

SOTTHANAM,
[joined.

blessing.

SUPINAM,

to shine.

su-ppa-yutto (p. p.

thoroughly

SORACCAM,

tenderness.

su-bhavo, easily supported.

(f.),

pleasant speech.

su-mano,
su-mapito

satisfied.
(adj.), well-built.

SOSO, consumption.
8v-akkhdto, well told.

SURA

(f.),

intoxicating liquor.

SURIYO,
SUSU,

the sun.

H.

su-vi-jdno, easily

known.

HA (interj.),
HATTHI

truly.

a boy.

(m.), elephant.
bristling.

SUSSOSA (f.), desire to hear. SCJU (adj.), conscientious.

SOLO,
rheumatism.

HATTHO (p. p. p.),

HATTHO,
hand.
heart.

H ADA YAM,
is

SEMHAM, phlegm. SEKHO (t. t.), one who

training.

under

HANTI, to kill. HAND A (interj.), come HAM MI YAM, house

by walls.

onl
surrounded

SETTHO
SEDO,

(adj.), best,

foremost.

sweat, moisture.
(f.),

HARATI,
and
sit-

to carry

away.

SENA

army.
[sleeping

SEN-ASANAM,
ting] dwelling.

HARI (adj.), green. HARITAM, grass.

haritattam, greenness, yellowness.

seyyako

(adj.), lying, sleeping.

HAVE
HI

(interj.), truly.

SEVATI,

to serve, to follow.
(f.),

(part.), for,
;

because

certainly,

SEVANA
to
;

addicted

to,

devotion
to.

indeed

also.

A-sevana, not addicted

HIMSATI,
by

to hurt.

SO SO

(pron.), this (see

(adj.),

Grammar).
sarh (adv.)

HIRANNAM,
HITO
(p. p. p.
p.),

gold.

own

HIRi, modesty, shame.

and
adj.), beneficial.

oneself.

SOKO, sorrow, grief. SOCATI, to grieve.

socanatfam, mourning.

hino (p. p.

wasted, decayed.

HETHETI,

to injure.

SOCANAM,

mourning.
addicted to drink
;

HETTHIMO (adj.), lower, lowest. HETU (adv.), on account of, by

means
of.
;

SONDO
fem.

(adj.),

SOXpI.

HOT!,

to be

see bhavati.

HERTFORD
FRINTZD BY eTIFHEN

ATIBTIS

AND SONS.

SINHALESE ALPHABET.
Vowels

^a
t^

^ Vowel Symbols.
a.

(^

if ^
.

(^y

u.

(^ u Se

o.

0.
ka.

^.
)ki

J.
^khu.

J. ^.

(B^

0.

Z^^ha

fc fi SJ^Jku. ty\Jkn6^ke. 6t3nko.

^ khu.

Nasal Vowels.

The symhol for any nasal

is

<?

hefore

ant. <Y>6 It is also used anc^her Consonant

Consonants.

^ ka.
O
ca ta
tX) du

'o)

kha

00

ga.

t50 gha

D ^a

d^cka
(^ tha
(3 tha

^j^
d du

f^jha
tb d^a

Q5^

^
Tia

S^ 'na
^^
ma

pa

60 ya
t^ sa

e3 pha 6 ra

C^ da
Va
la*
la.

Zd dha

&S
-^t~)

Vha
'i'^

/^

60 %a

f^

Consonant Symbols

r.

hra
k.

Tlrama

'

^
(XS'^ja

^
nda

nv.

Compound Consonants.
QCs
(to

'nj^aW^

^a

(Lb tlha
'nilMZ.

ddha

tD cca

U)

'bha

c^

^U)

Tikha.

e^^ jjha

r^

tlha

S^

'ndha
un

Burmese Alphabet.
Vowels.
__

SYMBOLS.}

L)

lb

CJOka,. COokcij c8ki.

cSH. coku. en

ku. crcoke.cxrDokc.

O/ ga
Nns/iL Vowels.

GO
The
syrnhil for the nasal votv-ds is
tb

go.

5^

am

11

is

also vised

express

any nasal

htforc

another

consonant.

Simple Consonants.
CIO
O.S)

ka
ca
ta

O kha
DO cha

O ga

IX)

gha

O
3
CO

ja
<ia

qj

jha

na OD na
C
COO 7ia
t>

G
(J

tha

^ dha
O

OO ta

OO ^ha
-pha

dha
V-a

-na

U pa
ya OO Sa
(JO

OO hha
la

Q ma

O.OJ

ra

OO ha

Consonant Symbols. C iia. OCT nka

^
J

OJ

ya,

^
ij-a -V-a

C
a

O^ (m
GO

yya
kra /3
ft^a

^ Uhya
^ra
rtiha

OO

ha

on

nha

Virdma
Compound Consonants.

O ob^t.

(^
O)

ryda

eg

?i/ia

g ddka

ddha

ppa

^/^^ta

OO OQ s^n a

OOO Ssa.

stn

XAMBODIAN ALPHABET.
Vowels.
,

%^a.

%^cL.

/Ti.

^
Vowel Symbols.

^
i^
<i>

i.

Q^vb.

QjjM

0\e.
\

o.

^Q^

0,^

o
PTka.

e^ka ^ki ^ki. eTku.?^ku.C^ke.C^h

.
.

Nasal Vowels. The symhol ^ is added to the simple irow-el: It is also used as a nasal hefcrt %^ arn
another consonant

Simple Consonants

^
i^

ka

kha

f? ga

Xl^ gka
flSJ jha
(T^ dha
t(S

O
ti^

-iia

i3 ca
ta

^ cha

^
^

ta

^
^

Iha

^ n

ja

TQ ^a
na
Tva

da

thu

^
G^

da
Int

dha

tS pa
i^X^tfcL

W pha
ra

'^ Vha

%^ ma

SkS la

v-a

sa

U^ha
rcL
j

"^

la

Compound Consonants
fSymtcl for

)0

l^ra

\^^ ndra

gemintdtcn

^Vssa SS^ ppa

**P

klika

iz^^ ncfka

(AO nda

f^

ttha

^ ccka C^ nca ^)0 ttka O ^^ ddha ^ dvu

ti^a

JV nna

%^ mVa.

UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO
t

~2

CO

LIBRARif

o o

o
tf>
i

At

o
t
14

O
-J

Acme
Under

Library Card
Pat.

Pocket

" Rrf. Index File."

Made by LIBRARY

BUREAU